Chevrolet - Traverse - Workshop Manual - 2011 - 2011

Factory Workshop Manual Make Chevrolet Model Traverse Awd Engine and year V6-3.6L (2011) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 12 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 18 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-002G Date: August 23, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Black or Blank Screen, Radio Reset, Map Screen Stops Updating or Freezes, Voice Recognition Inoperative, Dead Battery (Update Navigation Radio Calibration and/or Software) Models: 2009 Buick Lucerne 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009 Cadillac Escalade 2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2009 Pontiac Torrent 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK, VUE Equipped with Navigation Radio RPO U3R, UZR, U3U, UUM or U4H Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add radio RPOs and remove both the Attention statement and the radio part number identification table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-002F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: Condition 1 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models: - Intermittent blank or black screen occurring with XM traffic alerts. - Map screen freezes or stops updating while driving. - Navigation radio resets upon startup, due to Language selection changes on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Condition 2 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models except the Cadillac Escalade: - Abnormal Rear Park Assist Chime operation, which may result in a dead battery. - Intermittent blank or black screen at start-up or while driving. - Intermittent blank or black screen when shifting from reverse to drive. - Radio appears to turn on twice at engine start by showing the splash screen 2 times. - Radio changes to FM after engine start when radio was previously tuned to XM. - Radio momentarily stops/locks up while reading the Map Disc. - Voice recognition is intermittently inoperative. Note If the following condition is observed, disconnect the negative battery cable in order to reset the radio, prior to programming the radio with the updated software. - Radio is inoperative or unresponsive to button press and has a black or blank screen. Cause These conditions may be caused by a software anomaly. Correction Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 27 Important Before proceeding with the update, advise the customer that the Address Book, Previous Destination data, and Preset data may be removed during the SW update. The user will have to input this data when the update is complete. Important - Do not eject the disc during the update. - Do not turn the ignition off or remove power to the radio during the update. - Do not leave the disc in the radio after the update. Do not give the disc to the customer. The software update disc may be used to update more than one vehicle. Condition 1 For these conditions, follow this procedure: Technicians are to update the navigation radio software using a software update disc, P/N 20884820. The software update disc is to be obtained from the GM Navigation Disc Center, using the GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information below. Navigation Radio Software Update for Cadillac Escalade Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the CONFIG and SEEK buttons (2) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (1), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version is 101F or higher (e.g.101H), the radio has the latest navigation software available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software update. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 28 4. Eject the map disc from the top map DVD slot (3) by pressing the EJECT button, if the disc is installed. Load the software update disc, P/N 20884820, into the top map DVD slot (3). 5. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 6. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the top map DVD slot. After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 7. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 101F, using the procedure outlined in step 2 above. 8. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 9. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Conditions 1 and 2 For these conditions, follow both of the 2 procedures. Navigation Radio Calibration and Software Update for All Other Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed after the opening screen has appeared. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the MENU and SEEK UP buttons (1) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (2), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. The Radio Calibration will be the two characters (3) as indicated in the above illustration. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version (2) is version 102C or higher (e.g.102D), and the radio calibration (3) is 40 or higher, the radio has the latest navigation software and calibration available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software and radio calibration versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software and calibration update. 4. A revised radio software calibration has been released to address these conditions. Reprogram the radio using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. 5. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 29 6. Open the front display by pressing and holding the EJECT button (1) for approximately 15 seconds. Eject the map disc from the revealed map DVD slot by pressing the EJECT button (2) located beneath the revealed map DVD slot (3). Load the software update disc, P/N 20990141, into the map DVD slot (3). 7. Do not push on the touch screen to close it. Close the front display by using both hands at the four corners of the display until the display fits securely into the radio. 8. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 9. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the map DVD slot (3). After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 10. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 102C, using the procedure outlined in Step 2. 11. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 12. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Parts Information Navigation software update discs are for the dealer to update the Navigation Radio software only. They DO NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. Do not give the software update disc to the customer. Navigation software discs may be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). Refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012E for additional information on how to obtain AVN software update discs. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information - Via the telephone at 1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) - When calling the Navigation Disc Center for software update discs, provide the 5 digit dealer code so the order can be processed correctly. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 30 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-002G Date: August 23, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Black or Blank Screen, Radio Reset, Map Screen Stops Updating or Freezes, Voice Recognition Inoperative, Dead Battery (Update Navigation Radio Calibration and/or Software) Models: 2009 Buick Lucerne 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009 Cadillac Escalade 2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2009 Pontiac Torrent 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK, VUE Equipped with Navigation Radio RPO U3R, UZR, U3U, UUM or U4H Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add radio RPOs and remove both the Attention statement and the radio part number identification table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-002F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: Condition 1 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models: - Intermittent blank or black screen occurring with XM traffic alerts. - Map screen freezes or stops updating while driving. - Navigation radio resets upon startup, due to Language selection changes on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Condition 2 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models except the Cadillac Escalade: - Abnormal Rear Park Assist Chime operation, which may result in a dead battery. - Intermittent blank or black screen at start-up or while driving. - Intermittent blank or black screen when shifting from reverse to drive. - Radio appears to turn on twice at engine start by showing the splash screen 2 times. - Radio changes to FM after engine start when radio was previously tuned to XM. - Radio momentarily stops/locks up while reading the Map Disc. - Voice recognition is intermittently inoperative. Note If the following condition is observed, disconnect the negative battery cable in order to reset the radio, prior to programming the radio with the updated software. - Radio is inoperative or unresponsive to button press and has a black or blank screen. Cause These conditions may be caused by a software anomaly. Correction Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 36 Important Before proceeding with the update, advise the customer that the Address Book, Previous Destination data, and Preset data may be removed during the SW update. The user will have to input this data when the update is complete. Important - Do not eject the disc during the update. - Do not turn the ignition off or remove power to the radio during the update. - Do not leave the disc in the radio after the update. Do not give the disc to the customer. The software update disc may be used to update more than one vehicle. Condition 1 For these conditions, follow this procedure: Technicians are to update the navigation radio software using a software update disc, P/N 20884820. The software update disc is to be obtained from the GM Navigation Disc Center, using the GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information below. Navigation Radio Software Update for Cadillac Escalade Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the CONFIG and SEEK buttons (2) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (1), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version is 101F or higher (e.g.101H), the radio has the latest navigation software available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software update. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 37 4. Eject the map disc from the top map DVD slot (3) by pressing the EJECT button, if the disc is installed. Load the software update disc, P/N 20884820, into the top map DVD slot (3). 5. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 6. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the top map DVD slot. After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 7. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 101F, using the procedure outlined in step 2 above. 8. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 9. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Conditions 1 and 2 For these conditions, follow both of the 2 procedures. Navigation Radio Calibration and Software Update for All Other Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed after the opening screen has appeared. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the MENU and SEEK UP buttons (1) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (2), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. The Radio Calibration will be the two characters (3) as indicated in the above illustration. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version (2) is version 102C or higher (e.g.102D), and the radio calibration (3) is 40 or higher, the radio has the latest navigation software and calibration available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software and radio calibration versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software and calibration update. 4. A revised radio software calibration has been released to address these conditions. Reprogram the radio using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. 5. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 38 6. Open the front display by pressing and holding the EJECT button (1) for approximately 15 seconds. Eject the map disc from the revealed map DVD slot by pressing the EJECT button (2) located beneath the revealed map DVD slot (3). Load the software update disc, P/N 20990141, into the map DVD slot (3). 7. Do not push on the touch screen to close it. Close the front display by using both hands at the four corners of the display until the display fits securely into the radio. 8. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 9. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the map DVD slot (3). After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 10. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 102C, using the procedure outlined in Step 2. 11. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 12. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Parts Information Navigation software update discs are for the dealer to update the Navigation Radio software only. They DO NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. Do not give the software update disc to the customer. Navigation software discs may be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). Refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012E for additional information on how to obtain AVN software update discs. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information - Via the telephone at 1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) - When calling the Navigation Disc Center for software update discs, provide the 5 digit dealer code so the order can be processed correctly. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 39 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 48 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 49 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 50 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 56 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 57 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 58 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 68 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 69 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 70 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 71 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 77 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 78 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 79 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 80 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 87 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 88 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 89 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 90 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 91 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 113 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: Recalls Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 119 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 130 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 131 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 132 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 133 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 139 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 140 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 141 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 142 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference > Page 148 Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 160 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 161 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 162 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 163 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 164 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 165 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 166 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 167 Alignment: Specifications Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks: Service Precautions TUNE-UP SERVICE PRECAUTIONS - Tag or mark vacuum hoses before disconnecting them. After completing a job, double check that the vacuum hoses are properly connected. - To disconnect vacuum hoses, pull on the end, not the middle of the hose. - To pull apart electrical connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires. - Before disconnecting pressurized fuel lines, always perform Fuel Pressure Release procedure in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. - When replacing fuel filters, always check all affected lines and fittings for leaks. - Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. To prevent serious burns: Avoid contact with hot metal parts. - Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 171 - Before servicing the vehicle: Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. - Take caution that keys, buckles, or buttons do not scratch paint. - Do not operate the engine indoors without proper ventilation. - Do not smoke while working on the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Air Filter: > 10-01-37-002 > Dec > 10 > A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle Cabin Air Filter: Customer Interest A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-01-37-002 Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle (Install Cabin Filter into HVAC Module) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Built Prior to October 11, 2010 Condition Some customers may comment on a gear oil type odor in the interior of the vehicle. The odor may be coming in through the air vents when the HVAC system is in the non-recirculation mode and can be misdiagnosed as an HVAC concern. The condition is most noticeable when the vehicle is idling at operating temperature after an extended drive. The odor will typically dissipate when the HVAC system is placed in the recirculation mode. Cause This condition may be caused by PTU (transfer case) fluid odor being pulled into the vehicle through the HVAC air inlet due to the location of the PTU vent. Correction To eliminate the odor, install a cabin charcoal filter into the HVAC module using the following procedure. 1. Remove the instrument panel compartment. Refer to the Instrument Panel Compartment Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Cut out the molded access panel on the HVAC module using the appropriate tool. 3. File down any rough edges to ensure a proper fit. 4. Install the filter element into the tray. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Air Filter: > 10-01-37-002 > Dec > 10 > A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle > Page 181 5. Slide the tray into the HVAC module and press into position ensuring the four locking tabs are fully seated. 6. Remove any debris. 7. Install the instrument panel compartment. Refer to the Instrument Panel Compartment Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Air Filter: > 10-01-37-002 > Dec > 10 > A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle Cabin Air Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-01-37-002 Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle (Install Cabin Filter into HVAC Module) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Built Prior to October 11, 2010 Condition Some customers may comment on a gear oil type odor in the interior of the vehicle. The odor may be coming in through the air vents when the HVAC system is in the non-recirculation mode and can be misdiagnosed as an HVAC concern. The condition is most noticeable when the vehicle is idling at operating temperature after an extended drive. The odor will typically dissipate when the HVAC system is placed in the recirculation mode. Cause This condition may be caused by PTU (transfer case) fluid odor being pulled into the vehicle through the HVAC air inlet due to the location of the PTU vent. Correction To eliminate the odor, install a cabin charcoal filter into the HVAC module using the following procedure. 1. Remove the instrument panel compartment. Refer to the Instrument Panel Compartment Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Cut out the molded access panel on the HVAC module using the appropriate tool. 3. File down any rough edges to ensure a proper fit. 4. Install the filter element into the tray. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Air Filter: > 10-01-37-002 > Dec > 10 > A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle > Page 187 5. Slide the tray into the HVAC module and press into position ensuring the four locking tabs are fully seated. 6. Remove any debris. 7. Install the instrument panel compartment. Refer to the Instrument Panel Compartment Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 188 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER The filter removes dust, pollen, and other airborne irritants from outside air and inside air when in recirculation mode. 1. Open the glove box. 2. Twist the compartment retainers (A) and pull outward to remove. 3. Lower the instrument panel compartment assembly (B) beyond the stops. 4. If needed, unsnap the instrument panel compartment assembly (B) from the instrument panel. When re-installing, be sure the instrument panel compartment dampener arm is aligned properly to the dampener gear assembly. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 189 5. Squeeze the housing cover (A) tabs to remove. 6. Remove the old air filter from the passenger compartment air filter housing (B). 7. Install the new air filter. 8. Replace the housing cover. 9. If removed, re-install the instrument panel compartment assembly. 10. Re-install the compartment retainers. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > System Information > Service Precautions Hoses: Service Precautions SERVICE PRECAUTIONS To prevent vehicle damage, always observe the following precautions: After servicing a hose, check for leaks before and after test driving the vehicle. - Always use the correct size hose. Do not use standard sized hose in place of metric hose or vice versa. Always use the correct type of hose. Never use vacuum hose in place of fuel hose. Never use heater hose in place of PCV hose. - When replacing hoses which are attached to the engine on one end and the frame or body on the other end, always leave sufficient length to compensate for engine movement (from torque). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Hydraulic Brake System: DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, in Canada 88862807). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 11.4 quarts (10.8 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 201 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 240 000 km (150,000 miles), whichever occurs first. The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture: Gives freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). Protects against rust and corrosion. Will not damage aluminum parts. Helps keep the proper engine temperature. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. NOTICE: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed for the cooling system. Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regarding used coolant disposal. This will help protect the environment and your health. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information > Page 206 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID 6T70 / 6T75 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Valve Body Cover Removal ................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Fluid Change - Drain Plug .................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Overhaul .................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 7.0 - 9.0 liters (7.4 - 9.5 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 209 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Carrier Assy. - Differential (Rear Drive Module) Lubricant Fill Quantity .............................................. ......................................................................................................................... 1.0 liters (1.06 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 214 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Carrier Assy. - Differential (Rear Drive Module) Lubricant GM 75W-90 Synthetic Gear Oil GM P/N 89021677 (Canada 89021678). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications TRANSFER CASE (POWER TRANSFER UNIT) .......................................................................................................................... 1.0 liters (1.06 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 219 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications TRANSFER CASE (POWER TRANSFER UNIT) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 224 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 225 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... 5.5 quarts (5.2 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 228 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE OIL Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade: SPECIFICATION Use and ask for engine oils with the dexos© certification mark. Oils meeting the requirements of the vehicle should have the dexos certification mark on the container. This certification mark indicates that the oil has been approved to the dexos specification. This vehicle was filled at the factory with dexos-approved engine oil. NOTICE: Use only engine oil that is approved to the dexos specification or an equivalent engine oil of the appropriate viscosity grade. Engine oils approved to the dexos specification will show the dexos symbol on the container. Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are unsure whether the oil is approved to the dexos specification, ask your service provider. USE OF SUBSTITUTE ENGINE OILS IF DEXOS IS UNAVAILABLE: In the event that dexos-approved engine oil is not available at an oil change or for maintaining proper oil level, you may use substitute engine oil displaying the API Starburst symbol and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade. Use of oils that do not meet the dexos specification, however, may result in reduced performance under certain circumstances. VISCOSITY GRADE SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity grade for the vehicle. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50. COLD TEMPERATURE OPERATION: In an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -29°C (-20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should be used. An oil of this viscosity grade will provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures. When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, be sure to always select an oil that meets the required specification, dexos. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES/ENGINE OIL FLUSHES Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the dexos specification and displaying the dexos certification mark are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. WHAT TO DO WITH USED OIL Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM GM Power Steering Fluid GM P/N 89021184 (Canadian P/N 89021186) or equivalent. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BLOCK The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 237 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 238 Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. FUSES ................................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... USAGE A/C CLUTCH ....................................................................................................................................... ......................................... Air Conditioning Clutch ABS MTR .............................................................................................................................................................. Antilock Braking System (ABS) Motor AFS ......................................................................................... ..................................................................................... Adaptive Forward Lighting System Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 239 AIRBAG ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ Airbag System AUX POWER ..................................................... ....................................................................................................................................... Auxiliary Power AUX VAC PUMP ...................................................................................................................... .................................................. Auxiliary Vacuum Pump AWD .......................................................... ................................................................................................................................... All-Wheel-Drive System BATT 1 ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. Battery 1 BATT 2 .................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. . Battery 2 BATT 3 ............................................................................................................................... .................................................................................. Battery 3 CIGAR LIGHTER .............................. ............................................................................................................................................................ Cigar Lighter ECM ............................................................................................................................... ................................................................ Engine Control Module ECM 1 ........................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Engine Control Module 1 EMISSION 1 ............................................................................................................ .......................................................................................... Emission 1 EMISSION 2 .......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .............. Emission 2 EVEN COILS ..................................................................................................... ................................................................................... Even Injector Coils FAN 1 ............................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Cooling Fan 1 FAN 2 ........................................................................................................... ................................................................................................. Cooling Fan 2 FOG LAMP ................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................... Fog Lamps FSCM ..................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Fuel System Control Module HORN ................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Horn HTD MIR ........................................................................................... .............................................................................. Heated Outside Rearview Mirror HVAC BLWR ...................................................................................................................................... Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Blower LT HI BEAM ......................................................................... ................................................................................................... Left High-Beam Headlamp LT LO BEAM .................................................................................................................................................. ......................... Left Low-Beam Headlamp LT PRK ........................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... Left Parking Lamp LT TRLR STOP/TRN ............................................................................................................................................. Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal ODD COILS ....................................................................................... .................................................................................................... Odd Injector Coils PCM IGN ........... ......................................................................................................................................................... Powertrain Control Module Ignition PWR L/GATE .............................................................................. ................................................................................................................ Power Liftgate PWR OUTLET .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. Power Outlet REAR CAMERA .......................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Rear Camera RR APO ............................................................................................................................................... ................................. Rear Accessory Power Outlet RR DEFOG ....................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ Rear Defogger RR HVAC ............................................................................................................................. ................................................. Rear Climate Control System RT HI BEAM ...................................... ................................................................................................................................... Right High-Beam Headlamp RT LO BEAM .................................................................................................. ....................................................................... Right Low-Beam Headlamp RT PRK .......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....... Right Parking Lamp RT TRLR STOP/TRN .......................................................................................................................................... Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal RVC SNSR ...................................................................................... .............................................................................. Regulated Voltage Control Sensor S/ROOF/SUNSHADE .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................... Sunroof SERVICE ........................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... Service Repair SPARE ..................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................... Spare Stop Lamps (China Only) ............................................................................................................................................................ Stop Lamps (China Only) STRTR ....................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................... Starter TCM ......................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Transmission Control Module TRANS ................................................................................................. .......................................................................................................... Transmission TRLR BCK/UP ... .............................................................................................................................................................. .............. Trailer Back-up Lamps TRLR BRK ....................................................................................... .............................................................................................................. Trailer Brake TRLR PRK LAMP ................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Trailer Parking Lamps TRLR PWR ............................................................................. ....................................................................................................................... Trailer Power WPR/WSW .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................... Windshield Wiper/Washer RELAYS .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................... USAGE A/C CMPRSR CLTCH ............................................................................................................................................. Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch AUX VAC PUMP ............................................................................. ........................................................................................... Auxiliary Vacuum Pump CRNK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Switched Power FAN 1 ........................................................................................... ................................................................................................................. Cooling Fan 1 FAN 2 ......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................................... Cooling Fan 2 FAN 3 ..................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan 3 FOG LAMP ................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... Fog Lamps HI BEAM ..................................................................... ................................................................................................................... High-Beam Headlamps HID/LO BEAM ............................................................................................................................ High Intensity Discharge (HID) Low-Beam Headlamps HORN ................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... Horn IGN ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................... Ignition Main LT TRLR STOP/TRN .................................................................................................................................. Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal Lamp PRK LAMP ...................................................................................... .................................................................................................................. Park Lamp PWR/TRN ...... .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................................... Powertrain RR DEFOG ................................................................................ .................................................................................................... Rear Window Defogger Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 240 RT TRLR STOP/TRN ................................................................................................................................ Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal Lamp Stop Lamps ..................................................................................... ............................................................................................ Stop Lamps (China Only) TRLR BCK/UP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................ Trailer Back-up Lamps WPR .............................................................................. .......................................................................................................................... Windshield Wiper WPR HI ................................................................................................................................................ ............................... Windshield Wiper High Speed Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 241 Fuse: Locations Instrument Panel Fuse Block - Owners Manual Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located under the instrument panel on the passenger side of the vehicle. Pull down on the cover to access the fuse block. Fuse Side The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. FUSES ................................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... USAGE Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 242 AIRBAG ............................................................................................................................................... .................................................................... Airbag AMP .................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................. Amplifier BCK/UP/STOP ..................................................................................................................... ....................................................... Back-up Lamp/Stoplamp BCM .................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Body Control Module CNSTR/VENT ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................... Canister Vent CTSY ........................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Courtesy DR/LCK ................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................ Door Locks DRL ..................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Daytime Running Lamps DRL 2 ................................................................................................................................... GMC HID Only (If Equipped)/Rear Fog Lamps-China Only DSPLY ............................................................................ ......................................................................................................................................... Display FRT/WSW ........................................................................................................................................... ....................................... Front Windshield Washer HTD/COOL SEAT .............................................. .............................................................................................................................. Heated/Cooling Seats HVAC ........................................................................................................................................ ....................... Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning INADV/PWR/LED ....................................... ................................................................................................................................. Inadvertent Power LED INFOTMNT ....................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. Infotainment LT/TRN/SIG ..................................... ............................................................................................................................................. Driver Side Turn Signal MSM ......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Memory Seat Module PDM ........................................ .......................................................................................................................................... Power Mirrors, Liftgate Release PWR MODE ................................................................................................ .................................................................................................... Power Mode PWR/MIR .................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................... Power Mirrors RDO ....................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................... Radio REAR WPR ......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Rear Wiper RT/TRN/SIG .................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Passenger Side Turn Signal SPARE .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................................ Spare STR/WHL/ILLUM ..................................................................... ............................................................................................. Steering Wheel Illumination Relay Side Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 243 RELAYS .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................... USAGE LT/PWR/SEAT ..................................................................................................................................... ............................... Driver Side Power Seat Relay RT/PWR/SEAT ................................................... ............................................................................................................ Passenger Side Power Seat Relay PWR/WNDW ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... Power Windows Relay PWR/COLUMN ......................................... .......................................................................................................................... Power Steering Column Relay L/GATE ........................................................................................................................ ................................................................................. Liftgate Relay LCK ............................................. ........................................................................................................................................................... Power Lock Relay REAR/WSW .......................................................................................................... ................................................................. Rear Window Washer Relay UNLCK ................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. . Power Unlock Relay DRL2 ........................................................................................................................................................ Daytime Running Lamps 2 Relay (If Equipped) LT/UNLCK ................................................................ ................................................................................................................. Driver Side Unlock Relay DRL ............................................................................................................................................................. Daytime Running Lamps Relay (If Equipped) SPARE ........................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................ Spare FRT/WSW ........................................................................................................................................... ............................. Front Windshield Washer Relay Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 249 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 250 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 251 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 252 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 253 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary. A "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message comes on. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and, at this time, the system must be reset. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. To reset the system: If the vehicle does not have Driver Information Center buttons: 1. Turn the ignition to "ON/RUN", with the engine off. The vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display. Press the trip odometer reset stem until "OIL LIFE REMAINING" displays. 2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until "OIL LIFE REMAINING" shows "100%." Three chimes sound and the "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message goes off. 3. Turn the key to "LOCK/OFF". If the "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message comes back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure. If the vehicle has Driver Information Center buttons: 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off. 2. Press the vehicle information button until "OIL LIFE REMAINING" displays. 3. Press and hold the "set/reset" button until "100%" is displayed. Three chimes sound and the "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message goes off. 4. Turn the key to "LOCK/OFF". If the "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message comes back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 273 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 274 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 275 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 276 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 277 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 290 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 291 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 292 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 293 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 294 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 295 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 296 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 297 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 298 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 299 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 300 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 301 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 302 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 303 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 312 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 313 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 314 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 319 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 324 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 325 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 326 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 332 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 333 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 334 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 339 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 344 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 345 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 346 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 351 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 356 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 357 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 358 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 364 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 365 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 366 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 371 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Trailer And RV Towing Information Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Trailer And RV Towing Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-00-89-021H Date: August 24, 2010 Subject: Supplemental Information on Trailer Towing and Recreational Vehicle Towing (Dinghy Towing) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to provide two dinghy towing procedures based on the model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-00-89-021G (Section 00 - General Information). The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealers of special procedures necessary when towing a trailer or when towing the vehicle behind a recreational vehicle. Towing a Trailer Trailer Weight Information The following chart shows how much the trailer can weigh, based on the vehicle powertrain combination and whether the vehicle is equipped with Trailer Provision (RPO V92). Retailers should refer customers to the appropriate Owner Manual for important trailering tips, vehicle maintenance, and safety rules before towing a trailer. Towing a Trailer with a Vehicle without Trailer Provisions (RPO V92) These vehicles must be modified by installing a new underhood bussed electrical center (UBEC) to provide full functionality for 4 circuits: ground, tail lamps, RH and LH stop/turn lamps. Perform this modification only if the customers will be using the vehicle to tow. The replacement of the UBEC remains the best solution to upgrade the vehicles wiring for towing. The electrical circuitry for the tail/stop lamps is controlled by the BCM and splicing into the body harness is not recommended. Towing a Trailer with a Vehicle with Trailer Provisions (RPO V92) It is necessary to modify the backup lamp circuit. Perform this procedure only if the customer will be using the vehicle to tow. 1. Disconnect the X7 connector from the Body Control Module (BCM). 2. Remove the terminal for pin 3 from the BCM X7 connector. The wire to this terminal is dark blue and is the 38 circuit. 3. Re-connect the X7 connector to the BCM. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Trailer And RV Towing Information > Page 376 4. Cut the terminal off the end of this wire and strip the end of the wire. 5. Splice this wire into the 24 circuit wire that goes into BCM connector X6, pin 2. The 24 circuit is light green. Recreational Vehicle Towing (Dinghy Towing) Recreational Vehicle Towing Information Important Vehicles that are "dinghy towed" must be started at the beginning of each day and at each fuel stop for a minimum of five minutes. Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle - such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as "dinghy towing" (towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and "dolly towing" (towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a "dolly"). With the proper preparation and equipment, many vehicles can be towed in these ways. Refer to the appropriate model/model year Owner Manual for towing preparation guidelines and dolly and dinghy towing procedures. The Towing Chart below summarizes powertrain combination compatibility with dolly and dinghy towing methods. *Caution These vehicle can be dinghy towed from the front for unlimited miles at 65 mph (105 km/h). To avoid vehicle damage, never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing these vehicles. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. **Caution Dolly towing an all-wheel drive vehicle may result in premature failure of the rear drive module. Dinghy Towing Procedure (2007-2008 Model Year) Caution If you tow your vehicle without performing each of the steps listed under "Dinghy Towing," you could damage the automatic transmission. Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing procedure prior to and after towing your vehicle. Caution Don't tow a vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a compact spare tire. Towing with two different tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause severe damage to the transmission. Important All-wheel drive vehicles may only be dinghy towed from the front, with all four wheels on the ground. 1. Position the vehicle to tow. Shift the transmission to PARK (P) and turn the ignition to OFF. 2. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY. 5. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N). 6. To prevent your battery from draining while the vehicle is being towed, remove the 50 amp BATT1 fuse (1) in the UBEC and store in a safe Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Trailer And RV Towing Information > Page 377 location. 7. Release the parking brake. Once you have reached your destination, do the following steps: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Reinstall the BATT1 fuse. 3. Shift the transmission to PARK (P), turn the ignition key to OFF and remove the key from the ignition. 4. Release the parking brake. Dinghy Towing Procedure (2009-2011 Model Year) Caution If you tow your vehicle without performing each of the steps listed under "Dinghy Towing," you could damage the automatic transmission. Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing procedure prior to and after towing your vehicle. Caution Don't tow a vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a compact spare tire. Towing with two different tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause severe damage to the transmission. Important All-wheel drive vehicles may only be dinghy towed from the front, with all four wheels on the ground. 1. Position the vehicle to tow. Shift the transmission to PARK (P) and turn the ignition to OFF. 2. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY. 5. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N). Important The fuses must be removed in the order specified. 6. Remove the 15 amp ECM fuse (1) in the UBEC and store in a safe location. 7. To prevent your battery from draining while the vehicle is being towed, remove the 50 amp BATT1 fuse (2) in the UBEC and store in a safe location. 8. Release the parking brake. Once you have reached your destination, do the following steps: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Reinstall the BATT1 fuse. 3. Reinstall the ECM fuse. 4. Shift the transmission to PARK (P), turn the ignition key to OFF and remove the key from the ignition. 5. Release the parking brake. Parts Information For part numbers and usage of the UBEC, see Group 02.483 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Order the UBEC with the same option content including RPO V92. Warranty Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Trailer And RV Towing Information > Page 378 Please advise the customer that the installation and cost of the new underhood bussed electrical center (UBEC) will not be covered under the vehicle's warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 386 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 387 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... 5.5 quarts (5.2 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 390 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE OIL Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade: SPECIFICATION Use and ask for engine oils with the dexos© certification mark. Oils meeting the requirements of the vehicle should have the dexos certification mark on the container. This certification mark indicates that the oil has been approved to the dexos specification. This vehicle was filled at the factory with dexos-approved engine oil. NOTICE: Use only engine oil that is approved to the dexos specification or an equivalent engine oil of the appropriate viscosity grade. Engine oils approved to the dexos specification will show the dexos symbol on the container. Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are unsure whether the oil is approved to the dexos specification, ask your service provider. USE OF SUBSTITUTE ENGINE OILS IF DEXOS IS UNAVAILABLE: In the event that dexos-approved engine oil is not available at an oil change or for maintaining proper oil level, you may use substitute engine oil displaying the API Starburst symbol and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade. Use of oils that do not meet the dexos specification, however, may result in reduced performance under certain circumstances. VISCOSITY GRADE SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity grade for the vehicle. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50. COLD TEMPERATURE OPERATION: In an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -29°C (-20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should be used. An oil of this viscosity grade will provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures. When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, be sure to always select an oil that meets the required specification, dexos. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES/ENGINE OIL FLUSHES Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the dexos specification and displaying the dexos certification mark are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. WHAT TO DO WITH USED OIL Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks: Service Precautions TUNE-UP SERVICE PRECAUTIONS - Tag or mark vacuum hoses before disconnecting them. After completing a job, double check that the vacuum hoses are properly connected. - To disconnect vacuum hoses, pull on the end, not the middle of the hose. - To pull apart electrical connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires. - Before disconnecting pressurized fuel lines, always perform Fuel Pressure Release procedure in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. - When replacing fuel filters, always check all affected lines and fittings for leaks. - Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. To prevent serious burns: Avoid contact with hot metal parts. - Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 394 - Before servicing the vehicle: Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. - Take caution that keys, buckles, or buttons do not scratch paint. - Do not operate the engine indoors without proper ventilation. - Do not smoke while working on the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... .............................................. 11.4 quarts (10.8 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 400 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 240 000 km (150,000 miles), whichever occurs first. The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture: Gives freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). Protects against rust and corrosion. Will not damage aluminum parts. Helps keep the proper engine temperature. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. NOTICE: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed for the cooling system. Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regarding used coolant disposal. This will help protect the environment and your health. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 408 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 409 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 410 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 411 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 412 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks: Service Precautions TUNE-UP SERVICE PRECAUTIONS - Tag or mark vacuum hoses before disconnecting them. After completing a job, double check that the vacuum hoses are properly connected. - To disconnect vacuum hoses, pull on the end, not the middle of the hose. - To pull apart electrical connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires. - Before disconnecting pressurized fuel lines, always perform Fuel Pressure Release procedure in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. - When replacing fuel filters, always check all affected lines and fittings for leaks. - Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. To prevent serious burns: Avoid contact with hot metal parts. - Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 416 - Before servicing the vehicle: Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. - Take caution that keys, buckles, or buttons do not scratch paint. - Do not operate the engine indoors without proper ventilation. - Do not smoke while working on the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 422 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 423 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 424 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 425 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 426 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 432 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 433 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 434 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 435 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 436 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-015 Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: General Motors' Position Regarding Use of E15 in Model Year 2007 and Newer Vehicles Models: 2007-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks General Motors' position regarding the Environmental Protection Agency announcement allowing the use of E 15 in 2007 and newer vehicles: - General Motors' remains focused on securing a safe and positive driving experience for our customers. GM believes that the waiver decision by the EPA regarding E 15 could lead to confusion for consumers as to what fuel their vehicle should use. In response, we will continue to encourage our customers to refer to their vehicle Owner Manual for proper fuel designation. The vehicle Owner Manual specifies that fuels containing more than 10 percent ethanol should not be used in GM vehicles that do not have a flex fuel designation. - GM has the largest fleet of flex fuel vehicles on the road today (over 4 million in the U.S.) and these vehicles can safely use ethanol blends of up to 85 percent ethanol. So blends of E 15 (15 percent ethanol), as in the partial waiver announced, are appropriate for these vehicles. However, ethanol blends greater than E 10 should not be used in GM vehicles that do not have a flex fuel designation as they are not designed and certified to run on gasoline consisting of more than 10 percent ethanol-blend volume to avoid any unintended consequences, as per: their Owner Manual. - We believe biofuels, especially E 85 ethanol, are an effective near-term solution to reduce petroleum dependence and the carbon footprint of driving. As the global leader in producing vehicles designed to handle ethanol blends from E 0 to E 85, GM offers 19 flexible-fuel vehicles for the 2011 model year. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 442 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-025F Date: December 13, 2010 Subject: Information on Clicking/Ticking Sound/Noise Heard During Cold Start, Sound/Noise Decreases But Continues as Engine Warms - Normal Operation of High Pressure Fuel Pump and Injectors Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, STS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 3.0L or 3.6L VVT Direct Injection V6 Engine (VINs G, D, V, Y - RPOs LF1, LLT) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-025E (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The 3.0L and 3.6L SIDI engines (RPOs LF1 and LLT) use a direct injection fuel system that operates at very high fuel pressures. A direct injection fuel system produces a rapid clicking and ticking sound that can be heard from the engine compartment. The sound is more evident when outside around the vehicle or when the hood is open. The sound is more noticeable during idle and is more frequent during a cold start, but lessens once the engine is warm. The rapid ticking noise on cold start up is the fuel pump (located on the rear of the left cylinder head) building up high fuel pressure. When the engine warm-up is completed, the high pressure fuel pump will continue to tick at a lower rate of approximately one tick per second during idle. The clicking sound is the fuel injectors pulsing on and off under higher fuel pressures. These sounds are the results of a normal direct injection fuel system operating properly. DO NOT attempt to repair or replace any parts for this kind of clicking or ticking concern. The clicking or ticking sound is not indicative of any concerns with the engine or the vehicle. You may wish to give the customer a copy of this bulletin. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 443 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-022G Date: October 27, 2010 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Information and Available Brands (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - Canada ONLY Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Canada Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and include an additional gasoline brand as a TOP TIER source. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). In the U.S., refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047I. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by the Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with Minimum Additive recommended by the CGSB Top Tier Fuel Availability Chevron was the first to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in Canada. Shell became the first national gasoline retailer to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline across Canada. Petro-Canada began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline nationally as of October 1, 2006. Sunoco began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in March of 2007. Esso began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in May of 2010. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 444 Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards The following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards in all octane grades : Chevron Canada (markets in British Columbia and western Alberta) - Shell Canada (nationally) - Petro-Canada (nationally) - Sunoco-Canada (Ontario) - Esso-Canada (nationally) What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency and no metallic additives. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent recommendations of Canadian standards and does not contain metallic additives, which can damage vehicle emission control components. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began in the U.S. and Canada on May 3, 2004. Some fuel marketers have already joined and introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota, Volkswagen and Audi. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. In the U.S., government regulations require that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In Canada, gasoline standards recommend adherence to U.S. detergency requirements but do not require it. In fact, many brands of gasoline in Canada do not contain any detergent additive. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required or recommended, and no metallic additives are allowed. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency and the intentional addition of metallic additives is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and engine performance, and also provide reduced emissions. Also, the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Who should use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. More information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at this website, http://www.toptiergas.com/. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 445 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up Fuel Injector: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-025F Date: December 13, 2010 Subject: Information on Clicking/Ticking Sound/Noise Heard During Cold Start, Sound/Noise Decreases But Continues as Engine Warms - Normal Operation of High Pressure Fuel Pump and Injectors Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, STS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 3.0L or 3.6L VVT Direct Injection V6 Engine (VINs G, D, V, Y - RPOs LF1, LLT) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-025E (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The 3.0L and 3.6L SIDI engines (RPOs LF1 and LLT) use a direct injection fuel system that operates at very high fuel pressures. A direct injection fuel system produces a rapid clicking and ticking sound that can be heard from the engine compartment. The sound is more evident when outside around the vehicle or when the hood is open. The sound is more noticeable during idle and is more frequent during a cold start, but lessens once the engine is warm. The rapid ticking noise on cold start up is the fuel pump (located on the rear of the left cylinder head) building up high fuel pressure. When the engine warm-up is completed, the high pressure fuel pump will continue to tick at a lower rate of approximately one tick per second during idle. The clicking sound is the fuel injectors pulsing on and off under higher fuel pressures. These sounds are the results of a normal direct injection fuel system operating properly. DO NOT attempt to repair or replace any parts for this kind of clicking or ticking concern. The clicking or ticking sound is not indicative of any concerns with the engine or the vehicle. You may wish to give the customer a copy of this bulletin. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up Fuel Pump: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Clicking/Ticking Noises On Cold Start Up INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-025F Date: December 13, 2010 Subject: Information on Clicking/Ticking Sound/Noise Heard During Cold Start, Sound/Noise Decreases But Continues as Engine Warms - Normal Operation of High Pressure Fuel Pump and Injectors Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2010-2011 Buick LaCrosse 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, STS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Equipped with 3.0L or 3.6L VVT Direct Injection V6 Engine (VINs G, D, V, Y - RPOs LF1, LLT) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-025E (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The 3.0L and 3.6L SIDI engines (RPOs LF1 and LLT) use a direct injection fuel system that operates at very high fuel pressures. A direct injection fuel system produces a rapid clicking and ticking sound that can be heard from the engine compartment. The sound is more evident when outside around the vehicle or when the hood is open. The sound is more noticeable during idle and is more frequent during a cold start, but lessens once the engine is warm. The rapid ticking noise on cold start up is the fuel pump (located on the rear of the left cylinder head) building up high fuel pressure. When the engine warm-up is completed, the high pressure fuel pump will continue to tick at a lower rate of approximately one tick per second during idle. The clicking sound is the fuel injectors pulsing on and off under higher fuel pressures. These sounds are the results of a normal direct injection fuel system operating properly. DO NOT attempt to repair or replace any parts for this kind of clicking or ticking concern. The clicking or ticking sound is not indicative of any concerns with the engine or the vehicle. You may wish to give the customer a copy of this bulletin. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 454 Fuel Pump: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. Wear eye protection. Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 ° C (1000 ° F).) Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Filler Neck: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Housing Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: Recalls Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 470 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 476 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Recalls Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 485 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 491 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 492 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 493 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 498 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 504 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 505 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-06-04-026C > Aug > 10 > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 506 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: Recalls Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 517 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 523 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information > Page 528 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID 6T70 / 6T75 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Valve Body Cover Removal ................................................................................................................................................. 5.0 7.0 liters (5.3 - 7.4 quarts) Fluid Change - Drain Plug .................................................................................................................................................... 4.0 6.0 liters (4.2 - 6.3 quarts) Overhaul .................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 7.0 - 9.0 liters (7.4 - 9.5 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 531 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: Recalls Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 541 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 547 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-07-30-052G Date: March 02, 2011 Subject: Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow(R) Models: 2011 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Automatic Transmission/Transaxle including Allison(R) Transmissions Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. The J 45096 transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test tool replaces current tool J 35944-A. J 45096 is a self-contained unit utilizing a 12-volt flow meter, shop air supply and DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid (ATF). In the flush mode, transmission fluid is cycled through the transmission oil cooling system. High-pressure air is automatically injected into the fluid stream adding agitation to the ATF oil to enhance the removal of contaminated ATF oil and debris. In the flow mode, an electronic flow meter is used to measure the flow capability of the ATF oil cooling system. A digital display indicates the ATF oil flow rate in gallons per minute (GPM) along with the amount of ATF oil in the supply vessel, supply vessel ATF oil temperature, machine cycles and the operating mode. The supply oil vessel has 30 L (32 qt) capacity and the waste oil vessel has 32 L (34 qt) capacity. The waste oil vessel is constructed of a translucent composite material that allows the user to easily identify the oil level. The waste oil vessel can accommodate vacuum evacuation and gravity draining. In the code mode, a random, encrypted code is generated that can be used for verification of flow test results. Current essential cooler line adapters are used to connect the J 45096 to the automatic transmission oil cooler lines that allows J 45096 to adapt to General Motors passenger cars and light duty trucks, current and past models (except the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo). The tool may be adapted for use on the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo by dealership personnel with a barbed hose connector and rubber hose obtained locally. The Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission has a transmission oil requirement which is slightly different than DEXRON(R) VI ATF. However, flushing the cooler with DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid is an acceptable service procedure. Very little fluid remains in the cooler after the flush procedure and the residual DEXRON(R) VI ATF in the cooler is compatible with the Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission fluid. Notice Insufficient oil flow through the ATF oil cooling system will cause premature transmission failure. The required minimum ATF oil flow rate reading is directly related to the supply oil temperature. Refer to the flow rate reference chart for the oil flow rate specification based on the temperature of the ATF in the supply vessel. Helpful Hints for Maintaining the Temperature at or above 18°C (65°F) Important - The temperature of the supply vessel oil must be 18°C (65°F) or greater for J 45096 to operate. It is recommended to store the J 45096 in an area of the dealership where the room temperature remains at or above 18°C (65°F) when not in use. - Do not attempt to increase the fluid temperature in the Transflow(R) machine with an engine oil dipstick, or any other immersion type heater. The Transflow(R) machine has a check valve in the supply reservoir. Inserting a heater will damage the check valve and the subsequent repair expense would be the dealer's responsibility. - A heater blanket, P/N J-45096-10, is available for the Transflow(R) transmission cooling system flushing tool. This heater fastens around the Transflow(R) internal supply vessel and runs on 110 volts AC. The heater will warm the ATF in the supply vessel to at least 18°C (65° F) and has a thermostat to hold a constant temperature. Store the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine in a room where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Keep the ATF level in the reservoir low when the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R), is not in use. Store several gallons of oil in an area where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Fill the reservoir of the J 45096 as needed before using the machine on Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 552 each repair. With the ATF in a tightly sealed container, place the container in a tub of hot water for a period of time. Then pour the ATF into the reservoir. This method works best with a low fluid level in the reservoir. Place the Transflow(R) machine in the direct sunlight with the cabinet door open to expose the reservoir to the rays of the warm sun. Flush / Flow Test Procedure Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle and require the transmission oil pan or transmission side cover to be removed include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate procedure. Important The J 45096 can be used to flush the transmission oil cooler system on an Allison equipped vehicle, but the flow meter should not be utilized. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate flow check procedure. Machine Displays After completion of the flush and flow test, the following information is to be recorded on the repair order. This information is displayed on the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine when the dial is in the code position. - Tested flow rate (displayed in Gallons Per Minute (GPM) - Temperature (displayed is degrees Fahrenheit) - Cycle number (a number) - Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code (i.e. A10DFB2) Warranty Information Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Performing a transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test will use between 4.7-7.5 L (5-8 qts) of DEXRON(R)VI transmission fluid. The amount Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 553 of transmission fluid (ATF), (DEXRON(R)VI) (fluid) that is to be charged for the flush portion of the repair should not exceed the allowable charge for 7.5 L (2 gal) of fluid. This expense should be shown in the Parts Section of the warranty claim document. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card, entered in the warranty claim labor operation Flush Code additional field (when available) and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 554 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 555 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Engine Crankcase and Subsystems Flushing Info. Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Engine Crankcase and Subsystems Flushing Info. INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-01-029E Date: April 29, 2010 Subject: Unnecessary Flushing Services, Additive Recommendations and Proper Utilization of GM Simplified Maintenance Schedule to Enhance Customer Service Experience Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and add information about the proper transmission flush procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-01-029D (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). An Overview of Proper Vehicle Service General Motors is aware that some companies are marketing tools and equipment to support a subsystem flushing procedures. These dedicated machines are in addition to many engine oil, cooling system, fuel system, A/C, transmission flush and steering system additives available to the consumer. GM Vehicles under normal usage do not require any additional procedures or additives beyond what is advised under the former Vehicle Maintenance Schedules or the current Simplified Maintenance Schedules. Do not confuse machines available from Kent-Moore/SPX that are designed to aid and accelerate the process of fluid changing with these flushing machines. Engine Crankcase Flushing General Motors Corporation does not endorse or recommend engine crankcase flushing for any of its gasoline engines. Analysis of some of the aftermarket materials used for crankcase flushing indicate incompatibility with GM engine components and the potential for damage to some engine seals and bearings. Damage to engine components resulting from crankcase flushing IS NOT COVERED under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. GM Authorized Service Information: Detailed, Descriptive, and Complete If a specific model vehicle or powertrain need is identified, GM will issue an Authorized Service Document containing a procedure and, if required, provide, make available, or require the specific use of a machine, tool or chemical to accomplish proper vehicle servicing. An example of this is fuel injector cleaning. Due to variation in fuel quality in different areas of the country, GM has recognized the need for fuel injector cleaning methods on some engines, though under normal circumstances, this service is not part of the maintenance requirements. GM has published several gasoline fuel injector cleaning bulletins that fully outline the methods to be used in conjunction with GM Part Numbered solutions to accomplish proper and safe cleaning of the fuel injectors with preventative maintenance suggestions to maintain optimum performance. You may refer to Corporate Bulletin Numbers 03-06-04-030 and 04-06-04-051 for additional information on this subject. Subsystem Flushing Flushing of A/C lines, radiators, transmission coolers, and power steering systems are recognized practices to be performed after catastrophic failures or extreme corrosion when encountered in radiators. For acceptable A/C flushing concerns, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 01-01-38-006. This practice is NOT required or recommended for normal service operations. The use of external transmission fluid exchange or flush machines is NOT recommended for the automatic or manual transmission. Use of external machines to replace the fluid may affect the operation or durability of the transmission. Transmission fluid should only be replaced by draining and refilling following directions in SI. Refer to Automatic/Manual Transmission Fluid and Filter Replacement. Approved Transmission Flushing Tool (Transmission Cooler Only) The Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Tool is recommended for GM vehicles. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Flushing and Flow Test in SI using the J 45096. Service Is Important to You and Your Customer General Motors takes great pride in offering our dealerships and customers high quality vehicles that require extremely low maintenance over the life of the vehicle. This low cost of ownership builds repeat sales and offers our customers measurable economy of operation against competing vehicles. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Engine Crankcase and Subsystems Flushing Info. > Page 560 Providing responsible services at the proper intervals will greatly aid your dealership with repeat business, and additional services when required. Most customers appreciate and gain trust in the dealership that informs and offers them just what they need for continued trouble-free operation. Examine your service department's practices and verify that all Service Consultants and Technicians focus on customer satisfaction, vehicle inspections, and other products at time of service. Use this opportunity to upgrade the services you provide to your customers. Here are a few suggestions: - Take the time required to align your dealership service practices with the new GM Simplified Maintenance Schedule. Use the new vehicle Owner's Manual Maintenance I and II schedules to create a "mirror image" in your advertising and dealer service pricing that is easily understandable to your customer. Taking advantage of this new service strategy may greatly increase your dealership service sales and customer retention while decreasing the frequency of visits and inconvenience to your customer. - Review your program to ensure that all vehicles coming in are evaluated for safety and wear items. Examine all vehicles for tire condition, signs of misalignment, brake wear, exterior lamp functionality, exhaust condition, A/C cooling performance, SRS or Air Bag MIL, along with Service Engine Soon or Check Engine indicators. If the Service Engine Soon or Check Engine MIL is illuminated, it is vital that you inform the customer of the concerns with ignoring the indicator and what the required repair would cost. In addition to the possibility of increased emissions and driveability concerns, many customers are unaware that lower gas mileage may also result, with additional cost to the customer. - Be complete in your service recommendations. Some sales opportunities are not being fully pursued nationally. Focus on overlooked but required maintenance that has real benefits to the customer. Many vehicles are equipped with cabin air filters. If these filters are used beyond replacement time, they may impede airflow decreasing A/C and heating performance. Make sure these filters are part of your recommended service. Note that some of our vehicles may not have been factory equipped but will accept the filters as an accessory. - Express the value in maintaining the finish quality of the customer's vehicle at the Maintenance I and II visits. More fully utilize the vehicle prep personnel you already have in place. In today's world, many people simply ignore the finish of their vehicle, at best infrequently using an automatic car wash for exterior cleaning. Offer vehicle detailing services in stages from just a wash and wax to a complete interior cleaning. When paired with the Simplified Maintenance visit, this will increase customer satisfaction. On return, the customer gets a visibly improved vehicle that will be a source of pride of ownership along with a vehicle that is now fully maintained. Also, reinforce the improved resale value of a completely maintained vehicle. - For customers who clean and maintain the appearance of their vehicles themselves encourage the use of GM Vehicle Care products. Many customers may have never used GM Car Wash/Wax Concentrate, GM Cleaner Wax or a longtime product, GM Glass Cleaner, which is a favorite of many customers who try it just once. If your dealership give samples of these products with new car purchases, customers may already be sold on the product but not willing to make a special trip to the dealership. Capitalize on sales at this time. Stock shelves right at the Service counter with these products and consider instituting compensation programs for Service Consultants who suggest these products. Many consumers faced with an intimidating wall full of car care products sold at local auto parts stores may find it comforting to purchase a fully tested product sold by GM that they know will not harm the finish of their vehicle. We suggest these competitively priced basic vehicle care products to emphasize: In USA: - #12378401 GM Vehicle Care Wash/Wax Concentrate 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #89021822 GM Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner Aerosol 18 oz. (510 g) - #12377966 GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #1052929 GM Vehicle Care Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #88861431 GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator 24 fl. oz. (0.710L) In Canada: - #10953203 GM Vehicle Care Wash & Wax Concentrate 473 mL - #992727 GM Glass Cleaner Aerosol 500 g - #10952905 GM Vehicle Care Liquid Cleaner/Wax 473 mL - #10953013 GM Vehicle Care Chrome Cleaner and Polish 454 mL - #10953202 GM Vehicle Care Wheel Brite 473 mL - #88901678 GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator 473 mL - Display signboards with the installed price for popular GM Accessories such as running boards and Tonneau Covers. Customers may not think to ask about these desirable items at the time of a service visit. - Finally, take advantage of the GM Goodwrench initiatives (Tire Program, Goodwrench Credit Card, etc. / Dealer Marketing Association (DMA) Promotions in Canada) to provide the customer with more reasons to identify your dealership as the best place to go for parts and service. Remember to utilize ALL of the service aspects you possess in your dealership to satisfy and provide value to your customer. Many businesses exist profitably as an oil change location, a vehicle repair facility, or a detailing shop alone. You already have the capabilities of all three and provide these services with the inherent trust of your customer, under the GM Mark of Excellence. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Carrier Assy. - Differential (Rear Drive Module) Lubricant Fill Quantity .............................................. ......................................................................................................................... 1.0 liters (1.06 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 566 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Carrier Assy. - Differential (Rear Drive Module) Lubricant GM 75W-90 Synthetic Gear Oil GM P/N 89021677 (Canada 89021678). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics Manual Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-07-29-004G Date: December 15, 2010 Subject: Manual Transmission Operating Characteristics Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior Chevrolet and GMC Medium Duty Trucks 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Manual Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and to add Cold Operation information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-07-29-004F (Section 07 Transmission/Transaxle). Important Even though this bulletin attempts to cover operating characteristics of manual transmissions, it cannot be all inclusive. Be sure to compare any questionable concerns to a similar vehicle and if possible, with similar mileage. Even though many of the conditions are described as characteristics and may not be durability issues, GM may attempt to improve specific issues for customer satisfaction. The purpose of this bulletin is to assist in identifying characteristics of manual transmissions that repair attempts will not change. The following are explanations and examples of conditions that will generally occur in all manual transmissions. All noises will vary between transmissions due to build variation, type of transmission (usually the more heavy duty, the more noise), type of flywheel and clutch, level of insulation, etc. Basic Information Many transmission noises are created by the firing pulses of the engine. Each firing pulse creates a sudden change in angular acceleration at the crankshaft. These changes in speed can be reduced with clutch damper springs and dual mass flywheels. However, some speed variation will make it through to the transmission. This can create noise as the various gears will accel and decel against each other because of required clearances. Cold Operation Manual transmission operation will be affected by temperature because the transmission fluid will be thicker when cold. The thicker fluid will increase the amount of force needed to shift the transmission when cold. The likelihood of gear clash will also increase due to the greater time needed for the synchronizer assembly to perform its function. Therefore when the transmission is cold, or before it has reached operating temperature, quick, hard shifts should be avoided to prevent damage to the transmission. Gear Rattle Rattling or grinding (not to be confused with a missed shift type of grinding, also described as a combustion knock type of noise) type noises usually occur while operating the engine at low RPMs (lugging the engine). This can occur while accelerating from a stop (for example, a Corvette) or while operating at low RPMs while under a load (for example, Kodiak in a lower gear and at low engine speed). Vehicles equipped with a dual-mass flywheel (for example, a 3500 HD Sierra with the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)) will have reduced noise levels as compared to vehicles without (for example, a 4500 Kodiak with the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)). However, dual-mass flywheels do not eliminate all noise. Neutral Rattle There are often concerns of rattle while idling in neutral with the clutch engaged. This is related to the changes in angular acceleration described earlier. This is a light rattle, and once again, vehicles with dual mass flywheels will have reduced noise. If the engine is shut off while idling in neutral with the clutch engaged, the sudden stop of the engine will create a rapid change in angular acceleration that even dual mass flywheels cannot compensate. Because of the mass of all the components, this will create a noise. This type of noise should not be heard if the clutch is released (pedal pushed to the floor). Backlash Backlash noise is created when changing engine or driveline loading. This can occur when accelerating from a stop, coming to a stop, or applying and releasing the throttle (loading and unloading the driveline). This will vary based on vehicle type, build variations, driver input, vehicle loading, etc. and is created from the necessary clearance between all of the mating gears in the transmission, axle(s) and transfer case (if equipped). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics > Page 571 Shift Effort Shift effort will vary among different style transmissions and synchronizer designs. Usually the more heavy duty the transmission, the higher the shift effort because of the increased mass of the components. Shift effort can also be higher in cold weather because the fluid will be thicker. Medium duty transmissions will not shift as quickly as a Corvette transmission. To reduce shift effort, do not attempt to rush the shift - allow the synchronizers to work as designed. Shifting harder will only increase the chance of rushing past the synchronizer leading to grinding while shifting. Non-Synchronized Gears Some light duty truck transmissions in 1st gear (creeper-gear) and reverse gears in various transmissions, along with all gears in some medium duty transmissions, may be non-synchronized. This means there is not a mechanism to match input and output shaft speeds to allow for a smooth shift. This function is left up to the driver. This can be noticed if a shift into 1st or reverse is attempted while the vehicle is rolling or before the input shaft stops rotating leading to a gear grind. The grinding can be reduced by coming to a complete stop and pausing for a moment before shifting into the 1st or reverse gear. Some slight grinding can be expected. In medium duty non-synchronized transmissions, the driver must match input shaft (engine) speed to output shaft (driveshaft) speed with every shift. This can be accomplished by double clutching, or by using other methods. If the driver is not able to perform this function properly, there will be gear grinding with each improperly completed shift. Driver training may be required to correct this condition. Clutch brakes are used in medium duty non-synchronized transmissions to allow a shift into gear at a stop. The clutch brake is used to stop the input shaft from spinning, allowing a shift into gear at a stop without grinding. The clutch brake is activated by pressing the clutch pedal all the way to the floor. When the clutch brake is used, it is possible to have a blocked shift with the vehicle stationary. If this occurs, engage the clutch slightly to rotate the input gear to allow the shift. The clutch brake is intended to only be used while at a stop. Care must be taken to not activate the clutch brake while shifting between gears. This could lead to excessive grinding or a blocked or missed shift. Skip Shift Currently, the Cadillac CTS-V, Pontiac GTO, Chevrolet Corvette and Camaro SS (other models may follow) equipped with the 6-speed manual transmission have a feature referred to as a "skip-shift." This feature only allows a shift from 1st to 4th gear when the indicator lamp is illuminated on the dash. Dealers cannot disable this feature as it was established to help meet fuel economy standards. The conditions for this feature are: engine coolant at normal operating temperature, vehicle speed of 24-31 km/h (15-19 mph), 21% or less throttle being used (refer to Service Information or the Owner Manual for more details.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: Recalls Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 582 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 588 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications TRANSFER CASE (POWER TRANSFER UNIT) .......................................................................................................................... 1.0 liters (1.06 quarts) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 594 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications TRANSFER CASE (POWER TRANSFER UNIT) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: Recalls Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 606 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts SERVICE UPDATE Bulletin No.: 10222 Date: July 26, 2010 Subject: 10222 - Service Update for Inventory and Customer Vehicles - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts - Expires with Base Warranty Models: 2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2011 GMC Acadia Equipped with 6-Speed Transmission (6T70/6T75) This service update includes vehicles in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealership for any reason. It will expire at the end of the involved vehicle's New Vehicle Limited Warranty period. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to reprogram the transmission control module on certain 2011 model year Buick Enclave, LaCrosse; Chevrolet Traverse, and GMC Acadia vehicles equipped with a 6-speed transmission (6T70/6T75). On some of these vehicles, the engine RPM may increase during a 1-2, 2-3, 3-2, or 2-1 shift for up to 1.5 seconds before the shift is completed. The condition most often occurs during low speed cornering. This service procedure should be completed as soon as possible on involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory and customer vehicles that return to the dealer for any type of service during the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage period. Vehicles Involved A list of involved vehicles currently in dealer inventory is available on the "Service Update Bulletin Information" link under the "Service" tab in GM GlobalConnect (US), or attached to the GlobalConnect message (Canada), used to release this bulletin. Customer vehicles that return for service, for any reason, and are still covered under the vehicle's base warranty, and are within the VIN breakpoints provided below, should be checked for vehicle eligibility in the appropriate system listed below. Important Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the Investigate Vehicle History link. Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. Parts Information No parts are required for this service update. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GM Customer Care and Aftersales. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2 and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. When using a MDI or Tech 2 for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/19/10 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 15 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use an approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module: > 10222 > Jul > 10 > Campaign - Increased RPM During Certain Shifts > Page 612 2. Reprogram the transmission control module (TCM). Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 1. Connect the MDI or Tech 2 to the vehicle. 2. Select J2534 MDI or J2534 Tech 2 and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. 3. Select TCM Transmission Control Module -- Programming from the Supported Controllers screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Using the MDI, and either GDS or Tech 2, clear all DTCs, if required. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Hydraulic Brake System: DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, in Canada 88862807). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray Replacement Removal Procedure Warning: Refer to Approved Equipment for Collision Repair Warning . Note: The battery box upper flange is layered between several panels. To avoid unnecessary repair, separate the lower battery box from the upper flange. The upper flange will be left welded to the vehicle. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection . 3. Remove all related panels and components. 4. Repair as much of the damaged area as possible. Refer to Dimensions - Body (). 5. Remove the sealers and anti-corrosion materials from the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 623 Note: Do not damage any inner panels or reinforcement 6. Locate and drill out all the necessary factory welds. Note the number and location of the welds for installation of the battery tray. 7. Remove the battery tray. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 624 1. Locate and drill out the welds as necessary to separate the upper flange from the lower battery box on the service assembly. 2. Remove the upper flange from the lower battery box. 3. Prepare all mating surfaces for welding as necessary. 4. Apply GM-approved Weld-Thru Coating or equivalent to all mating surfaces. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair () Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 625 5. Position the battery tray to the vehicle. Clamp the battery tray in place. 6. Plug weld accordingly. 7. Clean and prepare all of the welded surfaces. 8. Apply the sealers and anti-corrosion materials to the repair area, as necessary. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair (). 9. Paint the repaired area. Refer to Basecoat/Clearcoat Paint Systems (). 10. Install all of the related panels and components. 11. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection . 12. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BLOCK The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 631 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 632 Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. FUSES ................................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... USAGE A/C CLUTCH ....................................................................................................................................... ......................................... Air Conditioning Clutch ABS MTR .............................................................................................................................................................. Antilock Braking System (ABS) Motor AFS ......................................................................................... ..................................................................................... Adaptive Forward Lighting System Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 633 AIRBAG ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ Airbag System AUX POWER ..................................................... ....................................................................................................................................... Auxiliary Power AUX VAC PUMP ...................................................................................................................... .................................................. Auxiliary Vacuum Pump AWD .......................................................... ................................................................................................................................... All-Wheel-Drive System BATT 1 ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. Battery 1 BATT 2 .................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. . Battery 2 BATT 3 ............................................................................................................................... .................................................................................. Battery 3 CIGAR LIGHTER .............................. ............................................................................................................................................................ Cigar Lighter ECM ............................................................................................................................... ................................................................ Engine Control Module ECM 1 ........................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Engine Control Module 1 EMISSION 1 ............................................................................................................ .......................................................................................... Emission 1 EMISSION 2 .......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .............. Emission 2 EVEN COILS ..................................................................................................... ................................................................................... Even Injector Coils FAN 1 ............................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Cooling Fan 1 FAN 2 ........................................................................................................... ................................................................................................. Cooling Fan 2 FOG LAMP ................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................... Fog Lamps FSCM ..................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Fuel System Control Module HORN ................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Horn HTD MIR ........................................................................................... .............................................................................. Heated Outside Rearview Mirror HVAC BLWR ...................................................................................................................................... Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Blower LT HI BEAM ......................................................................... ................................................................................................... Left High-Beam Headlamp LT LO BEAM .................................................................................................................................................. ......................... Left Low-Beam Headlamp LT PRK ........................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... Left Parking Lamp LT TRLR STOP/TRN ............................................................................................................................................. Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal ODD COILS ....................................................................................... .................................................................................................... Odd Injector Coils PCM IGN ........... ......................................................................................................................................................... Powertrain Control Module Ignition PWR L/GATE .............................................................................. ................................................................................................................ Power Liftgate PWR OUTLET .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. Power Outlet REAR CAMERA .......................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Rear Camera RR APO ............................................................................................................................................... ................................. Rear Accessory Power Outlet RR DEFOG ....................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ Rear Defogger RR HVAC ............................................................................................................................. ................................................. Rear Climate Control System RT HI BEAM ...................................... ................................................................................................................................... Right High-Beam Headlamp RT LO BEAM .................................................................................................. ....................................................................... Right Low-Beam Headlamp RT PRK .......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....... Right Parking Lamp RT TRLR STOP/TRN .......................................................................................................................................... Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal RVC SNSR ...................................................................................... .............................................................................. Regulated Voltage Control Sensor S/ROOF/SUNSHADE .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................... Sunroof SERVICE ........................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... Service Repair SPARE ..................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................... Spare Stop Lamps (China Only) ............................................................................................................................................................ Stop Lamps (China Only) STRTR ....................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................... Starter TCM ......................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Transmission Control Module TRANS ................................................................................................. .......................................................................................................... Transmission TRLR BCK/UP ... .............................................................................................................................................................. .............. Trailer Back-up Lamps TRLR BRK ....................................................................................... .............................................................................................................. Trailer Brake TRLR PRK LAMP ................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Trailer Parking Lamps TRLR PWR ............................................................................. ....................................................................................................................... Trailer Power WPR/WSW .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................... Windshield Wiper/Washer RELAYS .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................... USAGE A/C CMPRSR CLTCH ............................................................................................................................................. Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch AUX VAC PUMP ............................................................................. ........................................................................................... Auxiliary Vacuum Pump CRNK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Switched Power FAN 1 ........................................................................................... ................................................................................................................. Cooling Fan 1 FAN 2 ......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................................... Cooling Fan 2 FAN 3 ..................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan 3 FOG LAMP ................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... Fog Lamps HI BEAM ..................................................................... ................................................................................................................... High-Beam Headlamps HID/LO BEAM ............................................................................................................................ High Intensity Discharge (HID) Low-Beam Headlamps HORN ................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... Horn IGN ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................... Ignition Main LT TRLR STOP/TRN .................................................................................................................................. Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal Lamp PRK LAMP ...................................................................................... .................................................................................................................. Park Lamp PWR/TRN ...... .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................................... Powertrain RR DEFOG ................................................................................ .................................................................................................... Rear Window Defogger Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 634 RT TRLR STOP/TRN ................................................................................................................................ Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal Lamp Stop Lamps ..................................................................................... ............................................................................................ Stop Lamps (China Only) TRLR BCK/UP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................ Trailer Back-up Lamps WPR .............................................................................. .......................................................................................................................... Windshield Wiper WPR HI ................................................................................................................................................ ............................... Windshield Wiper High Speed Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 635 Fuse: Locations Instrument Panel Fuse Block - Owners Manual Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located under the instrument panel on the passenger side of the vehicle. Pull down on the cover to access the fuse block. Fuse Side The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. FUSES ................................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... USAGE Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 636 AIRBAG ............................................................................................................................................... .................................................................... Airbag AMP .................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................. Amplifier BCK/UP/STOP ..................................................................................................................... ....................................................... Back-up Lamp/Stoplamp BCM .................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Body Control Module CNSTR/VENT ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................... Canister Vent CTSY ........................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Courtesy DR/LCK ................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................ Door Locks DRL ..................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Daytime Running Lamps DRL 2 ................................................................................................................................... GMC HID Only (If Equipped)/Rear Fog Lamps-China Only DSPLY ............................................................................ ......................................................................................................................................... Display FRT/WSW ........................................................................................................................................... ....................................... Front Windshield Washer HTD/COOL SEAT .............................................. .............................................................................................................................. Heated/Cooling Seats HVAC ........................................................................................................................................ ....................... Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning INADV/PWR/LED ....................................... ................................................................................................................................. Inadvertent Power LED INFOTMNT ....................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. Infotainment LT/TRN/SIG ..................................... ............................................................................................................................................. Driver Side Turn Signal MSM ......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Memory Seat Module PDM ........................................ .......................................................................................................................................... Power Mirrors, Liftgate Release PWR MODE ................................................................................................ .................................................................................................... Power Mode PWR/MIR .................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................... Power Mirrors RDO ....................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................... Radio REAR WPR ......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Rear Wiper RT/TRN/SIG .................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Passenger Side Turn Signal SPARE .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................................ Spare STR/WHL/ILLUM ..................................................................... ............................................................................................. Steering Wheel Illumination Relay Side Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 637 RELAYS .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................... USAGE LT/PWR/SEAT ..................................................................................................................................... ............................... Driver Side Power Seat Relay RT/PWR/SEAT ................................................... ............................................................................................................ Passenger Side Power Seat Relay PWR/WNDW ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... Power Windows Relay PWR/COLUMN ......................................... .......................................................................................................................... Power Steering Column Relay L/GATE ........................................................................................................................ ................................................................................. Liftgate Relay LCK ............................................. ........................................................................................................................................................... Power Lock Relay REAR/WSW .......................................................................................................... ................................................................. Rear Window Washer Relay UNLCK ................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. . Power Unlock Relay DRL2 ........................................................................................................................................................ Daytime Running Lamps 2 Relay (If Equipped) LT/UNLCK ................................................................ ................................................................................................................. Driver Side Unlock Relay DRL ............................................................................................................................................................. Daytime Running Lamps Relay (If Equipped) SPARE ........................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................ Spare FRT/WSW ........................................................................................................................................... ............................. Front Windshield Washer Relay Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 642 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 643 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 644 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 645 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 646 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 647 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 656 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 662 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 671 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 676 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 677 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 678 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 683 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 689 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 694 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 695 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 696 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 701 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 702 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 703 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 704 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 705 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 706 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 711 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 717 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 718 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 719 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 720 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 721 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 722 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual Fuse: Locations Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BLOCK The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 728 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 729 Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. FUSES ................................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... USAGE A/C CLUTCH ....................................................................................................................................... ......................................... Air Conditioning Clutch ABS MTR .............................................................................................................................................................. Antilock Braking System (ABS) Motor AFS ......................................................................................... ..................................................................................... Adaptive Forward Lighting System Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 730 AIRBAG ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ Airbag System AUX POWER ..................................................... ....................................................................................................................................... Auxiliary Power AUX VAC PUMP ...................................................................................................................... .................................................. Auxiliary Vacuum Pump AWD .......................................................... ................................................................................................................................... All-Wheel-Drive System BATT 1 ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. Battery 1 BATT 2 .................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. . Battery 2 BATT 3 ............................................................................................................................... .................................................................................. Battery 3 CIGAR LIGHTER .............................. ............................................................................................................................................................ Cigar Lighter ECM ............................................................................................................................... ................................................................ Engine Control Module ECM 1 ........................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Engine Control Module 1 EMISSION 1 ............................................................................................................ .......................................................................................... Emission 1 EMISSION 2 .......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .............. Emission 2 EVEN COILS ..................................................................................................... ................................................................................... Even Injector Coils FAN 1 ............................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Cooling Fan 1 FAN 2 ........................................................................................................... ................................................................................................. Cooling Fan 2 FOG LAMP ................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................... Fog Lamps FSCM ..................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Fuel System Control Module HORN ................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................................... Horn HTD MIR ........................................................................................... .............................................................................. Heated Outside Rearview Mirror HVAC BLWR ...................................................................................................................................... Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Blower LT HI BEAM ......................................................................... ................................................................................................... Left High-Beam Headlamp LT LO BEAM .................................................................................................................................................. ......................... Left Low-Beam Headlamp LT PRK ........................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... Left Parking Lamp LT TRLR STOP/TRN ............................................................................................................................................. Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal ODD COILS ....................................................................................... .................................................................................................... Odd Injector Coils PCM IGN ........... ......................................................................................................................................................... Powertrain Control Module Ignition PWR L/GATE .............................................................................. ................................................................................................................ Power Liftgate PWR OUTLET .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. Power Outlet REAR CAMERA .......................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Rear Camera RR APO ............................................................................................................................................... ................................. Rear Accessory Power Outlet RR DEFOG ....................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ Rear Defogger RR HVAC ............................................................................................................................. ................................................. Rear Climate Control System RT HI BEAM ...................................... ................................................................................................................................... Right High-Beam Headlamp RT LO BEAM .................................................................................................. ....................................................................... Right Low-Beam Headlamp RT PRK .......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....... Right Parking Lamp RT TRLR STOP/TRN .......................................................................................................................................... Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal RVC SNSR ...................................................................................... .............................................................................. Regulated Voltage Control Sensor S/ROOF/SUNSHADE .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................... Sunroof SERVICE ........................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... Service Repair SPARE ..................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................... Spare Stop Lamps (China Only) ............................................................................................................................................................ Stop Lamps (China Only) STRTR ....................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................... Starter TCM ......................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Transmission Control Module TRANS ................................................................................................. .......................................................................................................... Transmission TRLR BCK/UP ... .............................................................................................................................................................. .............. Trailer Back-up Lamps TRLR BRK ....................................................................................... .............................................................................................................. Trailer Brake TRLR PRK LAMP ................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Trailer Parking Lamps TRLR PWR ............................................................................. ....................................................................................................................... Trailer Power WPR/WSW .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................... Windshield Wiper/Washer RELAYS .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................... USAGE A/C CMPRSR CLTCH ............................................................................................................................................. Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch AUX VAC PUMP ............................................................................. ........................................................................................... Auxiliary Vacuum Pump CRNK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................ Switched Power FAN 1 ........................................................................................... ................................................................................................................. Cooling Fan 1 FAN 2 ......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................................... Cooling Fan 2 FAN 3 ..................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... Cooling Fan 3 FOG LAMP ................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... Fog Lamps HI BEAM ..................................................................... ................................................................................................................... High-Beam Headlamps HID/LO BEAM ............................................................................................................................ High Intensity Discharge (HID) Low-Beam Headlamps HORN ................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... Horn IGN ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................... Ignition Main LT TRLR STOP/TRN .................................................................................................................................. Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal Lamp PRK LAMP ...................................................................................... .................................................................................................................. Park Lamp PWR/TRN ...... .............................................................................................................................................................. ...................................... Powertrain RR DEFOG ................................................................................ .................................................................................................... Rear Window Defogger Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 731 RT TRLR STOP/TRN ................................................................................................................................ Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal Lamp Stop Lamps ..................................................................................... ............................................................................................ Stop Lamps (China Only) TRLR BCK/UP ............................................................................................................................................... ................................ Trailer Back-up Lamps WPR .............................................................................. .......................................................................................................................... Windshield Wiper WPR HI ................................................................................................................................................ ............................... Windshield Wiper High Speed Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 732 Fuse: Locations Instrument Panel Fuse Block - Owners Manual Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located under the instrument panel on the passenger side of the vehicle. Pull down on the cover to access the fuse block. Fuse Side The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. FUSES ................................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... USAGE Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 733 AIRBAG ............................................................................................................................................... .................................................................... Airbag AMP .................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................. Amplifier BCK/UP/STOP ..................................................................................................................... ....................................................... Back-up Lamp/Stoplamp BCM .................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. Body Control Module CNSTR/VENT ............................................................................................................ ................................................................................... Canister Vent CTSY ........................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Courtesy DR/LCK ................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................ Door Locks DRL ..................................... ......................................................................................................................................................... Daytime Running Lamps DRL 2 ................................................................................................................................... GMC HID Only (If Equipped)/Rear Fog Lamps-China Only DSPLY ............................................................................ ......................................................................................................................................... Display FRT/WSW ........................................................................................................................................... ....................................... Front Windshield Washer HTD/COOL SEAT .............................................. .............................................................................................................................. Heated/Cooling Seats HVAC ........................................................................................................................................ ....................... Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning INADV/PWR/LED ....................................... ................................................................................................................................. Inadvertent Power LED INFOTMNT ....................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. Infotainment LT/TRN/SIG ..................................... ............................................................................................................................................. Driver Side Turn Signal MSM ......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ Memory Seat Module PDM ........................................ .......................................................................................................................................... Power Mirrors, Liftgate Release PWR MODE ................................................................................................ .................................................................................................... Power Mode PWR/MIR .................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ..................... Power Mirrors RDO ....................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................... Radio REAR WPR ......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................ Rear Wiper RT/TRN/SIG .................................................................................... ........................................................................................ Passenger Side Turn Signal SPARE .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................................ Spare STR/WHL/ILLUM ..................................................................... ............................................................................................. Steering Wheel Illumination Relay Side Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Engine Compartment Fuse Block - Owners Manual > Page 734 RELAYS .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................... USAGE LT/PWR/SEAT ..................................................................................................................................... ............................... Driver Side Power Seat Relay RT/PWR/SEAT ................................................... ............................................................................................................ Passenger Side Power Seat Relay PWR/WNDW ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... Power Windows Relay PWR/COLUMN ......................................... .......................................................................................................................... Power Steering Column Relay L/GATE ........................................................................................................................ ................................................................................. Liftgate Relay LCK ............................................. ........................................................................................................................................................... Power Lock Relay REAR/WSW .......................................................................................................... ................................................................. Rear Window Washer Relay UNLCK ................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. . Power Unlock Relay DRL2 ........................................................................................................................................................ Daytime Running Lamps 2 Relay (If Equipped) LT/UNLCK ................................................................ ................................................................................................................. Driver Side Unlock Relay DRL ............................................................................................................................................................. Daytime Running Lamps Relay (If Equipped) SPARE ........................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................ Spare FRT/WSW ........................................................................................................................................... ............................. Front Windshield Washer Relay Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 739 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 740 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 741 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 742 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 743 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 744 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 753 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 759 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 768 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 773 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 774 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 775 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 780 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-42-001B Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Low Beam Headlamp Bulb Diagnosis/Replacement (Inspect Bulb and Connector) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS, CTS-V 2010-2011 Cadillac CTS Sport Wagon, SRX 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2011 Chevrolet Malibu 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2006-2010 Pontiac G6 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK Attention: This bulletin DOES NOT apply to vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the part number for the recommended splice sleeve. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-42-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the low beam headlamp is inoperative. Correction DO NOT replace the entire headlamp assembly for this condition. Replace the bulb and inspect the connector following the procedure below. 1. Remove the headlamp bulb. Refer to Headlamp Bulb Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Inspect the connector. - If the connector is NOT discolored or damaged, replace the bulb only. For bulb part numbers, see Headlamp Bulb (Low Beam) in Group 02.727 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. - If the connector is discolored at the bulb interface, replace the connector (service pigtail listed below) and bulb. Important Use only Duraseal splice sleeves (salmon, P/N 19168446). Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI for splicing procedures. 1. Cut the wires of the connector approximately 45 mm (13/4 in) from the connector and splice in the service pigtail connector. Ensure that the splices are not above the connector when re-installing. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Verify that the headlamp is fully functional. Parts Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-42-001B > Jan > 11 > Lighting - Low Beam Headlamp(s) Inoperative > Page 786 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 791 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 792 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 793 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 798 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 799 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 800 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 801 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 802 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 803 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 808 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 814 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 815 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 816 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 817 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 818 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 819 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 825 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 826 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 827 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 828 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 829 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 830 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 831 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 832 Alignment: Specifications Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Bleeding: > 10-02-32-002A > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System Power Steering Bleeding: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-02-32-002A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Whine or Moan Type Noise from Power Steering System During Low Speed Maneuvers (Perform Repair as Outlined Below) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Built Prior to August 01, 2010 Attention: This bulletin also applies to any of the above models that may be export vehicles. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and provide a build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-02-32-002 (Section 02 - Steering). Condition Some customers may comment on a whine or moan type noise from the power steering system during low speed maneuvers. Cause This condition may be caused by either low or contaminated fluid or there may be air in the system. Correction 1. Inspect the power steering fluid for proper level, contamination or signs of air in the system. - If the fluid is low, fill and re-evaluate the vehicle. - If the fluid appears contaminated, flush the system (refer to the procedure in SI) and thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below. Re-evaluate the vehicle. - If there is air in the system, thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below and re-evaluate the vehicle. 2. If after re-evaluation the noise is not corrected or if the inspection does not identify the root cause, replace the power steering pump with new P/N 20954812. This new pump is a 12 vane pump. Vehicles built after August 01, 2010, already have the new pump. Power Steering System Bleed Procedure 1. Apply the park brake. 2. Using a floor jack and jack stands, raise the front of the vehicle until the center of the front wheels are approximately 61 cm (24 in) off the ground. 3. Fill the power steering fluid reservoir with fluid to the bottom of the filler neck. Leave the cap off. Place towels around the reservoir as fluid will flow out from the reservoir onto the engine. 4. With the key in the ON position and with the engine OFF, turn the steering wheel from stop to stop until the fluid level maintains a consistent level and air bubbles becomes fewer within the reservoir (fluid will rise and fall while the steering wheel is turned. Trapped air will allow the fluid to fall. Maintain fluid level at all times). It may take several minutes to complete this process. 5. Ensure that the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler neck. 6. Connect the CH-43485 adapter to the GE-23738-A pump. 7. Hold the CH-43485 adapter on the top of the reservoir filler neck. 8. Apply a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi). 9. Set the GE-23738-A pump down. The vacuum will hold the CH-43485 adapter in place. Note The vacuum gauge needle will fluctuate while the steering wheel is moving. 10. Maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) while turning the steering wheel from stop to stop. Hold the steering wheel at each steering stop until air bubbles become fewer within the clear hose. Maintain fluid level at all times. It may take several minutes to complete this process. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Bleeding: > 10-02-32-002A > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System > Page 855 11. With the steering wheel in the straight position, maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) for 5 minutes. 12. Inspect the condition of the fluid in the clear hose on the CH-43485 adapter. If any bubbles are in the fluid, repeat steps 10 and 11. 13. Lower the vehicle. 14. Relieve the vacuum in the GE-23738-A pump. 15. Remove the CH-43485 adapter from the reservoir filler neck. 16. Ensure that the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. 17. With the reservoir cap off, start the engine. Slowly rotate the steering wheel from stop to stop 10 times. Hold the steering wheel at each stop for 2 seconds. 18. Verify that the steering system does not shudder while turning the steering wheel. If the steering system exhibits a shudder condition, repeat steps 1 through 17. 19. Turn the engine OFF. 20. Ensure the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. Install the cap to the reservoir. 21. Test drive the vehicle. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the repair performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Bleeding: > 10-02-32-002A > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System Power Steering Bleeding: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-02-32-002A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Whine or Moan Type Noise from Power Steering System During Low Speed Maneuvers (Perform Repair as Outlined Below) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Built Prior to August 01, 2010 Attention: This bulletin also applies to any of the above models that may be export vehicles. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and provide a build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-02-32-002 (Section 02 - Steering). Condition Some customers may comment on a whine or moan type noise from the power steering system during low speed maneuvers. Cause This condition may be caused by either low or contaminated fluid or there may be air in the system. Correction 1. Inspect the power steering fluid for proper level, contamination or signs of air in the system. - If the fluid is low, fill and re-evaluate the vehicle. - If the fluid appears contaminated, flush the system (refer to the procedure in SI) and thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below. Re-evaluate the vehicle. - If there is air in the system, thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below and re-evaluate the vehicle. 2. If after re-evaluation the noise is not corrected or if the inspection does not identify the root cause, replace the power steering pump with new P/N 20954812. This new pump is a 12 vane pump. Vehicles built after August 01, 2010, already have the new pump. Power Steering System Bleed Procedure 1. Apply the park brake. 2. Using a floor jack and jack stands, raise the front of the vehicle until the center of the front wheels are approximately 61 cm (24 in) off the ground. 3. Fill the power steering fluid reservoir with fluid to the bottom of the filler neck. Leave the cap off. Place towels around the reservoir as fluid will flow out from the reservoir onto the engine. 4. With the key in the ON position and with the engine OFF, turn the steering wheel from stop to stop until the fluid level maintains a consistent level and air bubbles becomes fewer within the reservoir (fluid will rise and fall while the steering wheel is turned. Trapped air will allow the fluid to fall. Maintain fluid level at all times). It may take several minutes to complete this process. 5. Ensure that the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler neck. 6. Connect the CH-43485 adapter to the GE-23738-A pump. 7. Hold the CH-43485 adapter on the top of the reservoir filler neck. 8. Apply a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi). 9. Set the GE-23738-A pump down. The vacuum will hold the CH-43485 adapter in place. Note The vacuum gauge needle will fluctuate while the steering wheel is moving. 10. Maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) while turning the steering wheel from stop to stop. Hold the steering wheel at each steering stop until air bubbles become fewer within the clear hose. Maintain fluid level at all times. It may take several minutes to complete this process. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Bleeding: > 10-02-32-002A > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System > Page 861 11. With the steering wheel in the straight position, maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) for 5 minutes. 12. Inspect the condition of the fluid in the clear hose on the CH-43485 adapter. If any bubbles are in the fluid, repeat steps 10 and 11. 13. Lower the vehicle. 14. Relieve the vacuum in the GE-23738-A pump. 15. Remove the CH-43485 adapter from the reservoir filler neck. 16. Ensure that the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. 17. With the reservoir cap off, start the engine. Slowly rotate the steering wheel from stop to stop 10 times. Hold the steering wheel at each stop for 2 seconds. 18. Verify that the steering system does not shudder while turning the steering wheel. If the steering system exhibits a shudder condition, repeat steps 1 through 17. 19. Turn the engine OFF. 20. Ensure the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. Install the cap to the reservoir. 21. Test drive the vehicle. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the repair performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Bleeding: > Page 862 Power Steering Bleeding: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-02-32-002A Date: 101220 Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-02-32-002A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Whine or Moan Type Noise from Power Steering System During Low Speed Maneuvers (Perform Repair as Outlined Below) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Built Prior to August 01, 2010 Attention: This bulletin also applies to any of the above models that may be export vehicles. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and provide a build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-02-32-002 (Section 02 - Steering). Condition Some customers may comment on a whine or moan type noise from the power steering system during low speed maneuvers. Cause This condition may be caused by either low or contaminated fluid or there may be air in the system. Correction 1. Inspect the power steering fluid for proper level, contamination or signs of air in the system. - If the fluid is low, fill and re-evaluate the vehicle. - If the fluid appears contaminated, flush the system (refer to the procedure in SI) and thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below. Re-evaluate the vehicle. - If there is air in the system, thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below and re-evaluate the vehicle. 2. If after re-evaluation the noise is not corrected or if the inspection does not identify the root cause, replace the power steering pump with new P/N 20954812. This new pump is a 12 vane pump. Vehicles built after August 01, 2010, already have the new pump. Power Steering System Bleed Procedure 1. Apply the park brake. 2. Using a floor jack and jack stands, raise the front of the vehicle until the center of the front wheels are approximately 61 cm (24 in) off the ground. 3. Fill the power steering fluid reservoir with fluid to the bottom of the filler neck. Leave the cap off. Place towels around the reservoir as fluid will flow out from the reservoir onto the engine. 4. With the key in the ON position and with the engine OFF, turn the steering wheel from stop to stop until the fluid level maintains a consistent level and air bubbles becomes fewer within the reservoir (fluid will rise and fall while the steering wheel is turned. Trapped air will allow the fluid to fall. Maintain fluid level at all times). It may take several minutes to complete this process. 5. Ensure that the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler neck. 6. Connect the CH-43485 adapter to the GE-23738-A pump. 7. Hold the CH-43485 adapter on the top of the reservoir filler neck. 8. Apply a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi). 9. Set the GE-23738-A pump down. The vacuum will hold the CH-43485 adapter in place. Note The vacuum gauge needle will fluctuate while the steering wheel is moving. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Bleeding: > Page 863 10. Maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) while turning the steering wheel from stop to stop. Hold the steering wheel at each steering stop until air bubbles become fewer within the clear hose. Maintain fluid level at all times. It may take several minutes to complete this process. 11. With the steering wheel in the straight position, maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) for 5 minutes. 12. Inspect the condition of the fluid in the clear hose on the CH-43485 adapter. If any bubbles are in the fluid, repeat steps 10 and 11. 13. Lower the vehicle. 14. Relieve the vacuum in the GE-23738-A pump. 15. Remove the CH-43485 adapter from the reservoir filler neck. 16. Ensure that the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. 17. With the reservoir cap off, start the engine. Slowly rotate the steering wheel from stop to stop 10 times. Hold the steering wheel at each stop for 2 seconds. 18. Verify that the steering system does not shudder while turning the steering wheel. If the steering system exhibits a shudder condition, repeat steps 1 through 17. 19. Turn the engine OFF. 20. Ensure the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. Install the cap to the reservoir. 21. Test drive the vehicle. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the repair performed. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-02-32-002A Date: 101220 Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-02-32-002A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Whine or Moan Type Noise from Power Steering System During Low Speed Maneuvers (Perform Repair as Outlined Below) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Built Prior to August 01, 2010 Attention: Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Bleeding: > Page 864 This bulletin also applies to any of the above models that may be export vehicles. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and provide a build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-02-32-002 (Section 02 - Steering). Condition Some customers may comment on a whine or moan type noise from the power steering system during low speed maneuvers. Cause This condition may be caused by either low or contaminated fluid or there may be air in the system. Correction 1. Inspect the power steering fluid for proper level, contamination or signs of air in the system. - If the fluid is low, fill and re-evaluate the vehicle. - If the fluid appears contaminated, flush the system (refer to the procedure in SI) and thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below. Re-evaluate the vehicle. - If there is air in the system, thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below and re-evaluate the vehicle. 2. If after re-evaluation the noise is not corrected or if the inspection does not identify the root cause, replace the power steering pump with new P/N 20954812. This new pump is a 12 vane pump. Vehicles built after August 01, 2010, already have the new pump. Power Steering System Bleed Procedure 1. Apply the park brake. 2. Using a floor jack and jack stands, raise the front of the vehicle until the center of the front wheels are approximately 61 cm (24 in) off the ground. 3. Fill the power steering fluid reservoir with fluid to the bottom of the filler neck. Leave the cap off. Place towels around the reservoir as fluid will flow out from the reservoir onto the engine. 4. With the key in the ON position and with the engine OFF, turn the steering wheel from stop to stop until the fluid level maintains a consistent level and air bubbles becomes fewer within the reservoir (fluid will rise and fall while the steering wheel is turned. Trapped air will allow the fluid to fall. Maintain fluid level at all times). It may take several minutes to complete this process. 5. Ensure that the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler neck. 6. Connect the CH-43485 adapter to the GE-23738-A pump. 7. Hold the CH-43485 adapter on the top of the reservoir filler neck. 8. Apply a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi). 9. Set the GE-23738-A pump down. The vacuum will hold the CH-43485 adapter in place. Note The vacuum gauge needle will fluctuate while the steering wheel is moving. 10. Maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) while turning the steering wheel from stop to stop. Hold the steering wheel at each steering stop until air bubbles become fewer within the clear hose. Maintain fluid level at all times. It may take several minutes to complete this process. 11. With the steering wheel in the straight position, maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) for 5 minutes. 12. Inspect the condition of the fluid in the clear hose on the CH-43485 adapter. If any bubbles are in the fluid, repeat steps 10 and 11. 13. Lower the vehicle. 14. Relieve the vacuum in the GE-23738-A pump. 15. Remove the CH-43485 adapter from the reservoir filler neck. 16. Ensure that the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. 17. With the reservoir cap off, start the engine. Slowly rotate the steering wheel from stop to stop 10 times. Hold the steering wheel at each stop for 2 seconds. 18. Verify that the steering system does not shudder while turning the steering wheel. If the steering system exhibits a shudder condition, repeat steps 1 through 17. 19. Turn the engine OFF. 20. Ensure the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. Install the cap to the reservoir. 21. Test drive the vehicle. Parts Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Bleeding: > Page 865 Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the repair performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM GM Power Steering Fluid GM P/N 89021184 (Canadian P/N 89021186) or equivalent. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Pump: > 10-02-32-002A > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System Power Steering Pump: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-02-32-002A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Whine or Moan Type Noise from Power Steering System During Low Speed Maneuvers (Perform Repair as Outlined Below) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Built Prior to August 01, 2010 Attention: This bulletin also applies to any of the above models that may be export vehicles. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and provide a build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-02-32-002 (Section 02 - Steering). Condition Some customers may comment on a whine or moan type noise from the power steering system during low speed maneuvers. Cause This condition may be caused by either low or contaminated fluid or there may be air in the system. Correction 1. Inspect the power steering fluid for proper level, contamination or signs of air in the system. - If the fluid is low, fill and re-evaluate the vehicle. - If the fluid appears contaminated, flush the system (refer to the procedure in SI) and thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below. Re-evaluate the vehicle. - If there is air in the system, thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below and re-evaluate the vehicle. 2. If after re-evaluation the noise is not corrected or if the inspection does not identify the root cause, replace the power steering pump with new P/N 20954812. This new pump is a 12 vane pump. Vehicles built after August 01, 2010, already have the new pump. Power Steering System Bleed Procedure 1. Apply the park brake. 2. Using a floor jack and jack stands, raise the front of the vehicle until the center of the front wheels are approximately 61 cm (24 in) off the ground. 3. Fill the power steering fluid reservoir with fluid to the bottom of the filler neck. Leave the cap off. Place towels around the reservoir as fluid will flow out from the reservoir onto the engine. 4. With the key in the ON position and with the engine OFF, turn the steering wheel from stop to stop until the fluid level maintains a consistent level and air bubbles becomes fewer within the reservoir (fluid will rise and fall while the steering wheel is turned. Trapped air will allow the fluid to fall. Maintain fluid level at all times). It may take several minutes to complete this process. 5. Ensure that the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler neck. 6. Connect the CH-43485 adapter to the GE-23738-A pump. 7. Hold the CH-43485 adapter on the top of the reservoir filler neck. 8. Apply a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi). 9. Set the GE-23738-A pump down. The vacuum will hold the CH-43485 adapter in place. Note The vacuum gauge needle will fluctuate while the steering wheel is moving. 10. Maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) while turning the steering wheel from stop to stop. Hold the steering wheel at each steering stop until air bubbles become fewer within the clear hose. Maintain fluid level at all times. It may take several minutes to complete this process. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Pump: > 10-02-32-002A > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System > Page 877 11. With the steering wheel in the straight position, maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) for 5 minutes. 12. Inspect the condition of the fluid in the clear hose on the CH-43485 adapter. If any bubbles are in the fluid, repeat steps 10 and 11. 13. Lower the vehicle. 14. Relieve the vacuum in the GE-23738-A pump. 15. Remove the CH-43485 adapter from the reservoir filler neck. 16. Ensure that the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. 17. With the reservoir cap off, start the engine. Slowly rotate the steering wheel from stop to stop 10 times. Hold the steering wheel at each stop for 2 seconds. 18. Verify that the steering system does not shudder while turning the steering wheel. If the steering system exhibits a shudder condition, repeat steps 1 through 17. 19. Turn the engine OFF. 20. Ensure the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. Install the cap to the reservoir. 21. Test drive the vehicle. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the repair performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > 10-02-32-002A > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System Power Steering Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-02-32-002A Date: December 20, 2010 Subject: Whine or Moan Type Noise from Power Steering System During Low Speed Maneuvers (Perform Repair as Outlined Below) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Built Prior to August 01, 2010 Attention: This bulletin also applies to any of the above models that may be export vehicles. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add 2011 model year and provide a build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-02-32-002 (Section 02 - Steering). Condition Some customers may comment on a whine or moan type noise from the power steering system during low speed maneuvers. Cause This condition may be caused by either low or contaminated fluid or there may be air in the system. Correction 1. Inspect the power steering fluid for proper level, contamination or signs of air in the system. - If the fluid is low, fill and re-evaluate the vehicle. - If the fluid appears contaminated, flush the system (refer to the procedure in SI) and thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below. Re-evaluate the vehicle. - If there is air in the system, thoroughly bleed the system using the revised procedure listed below and re-evaluate the vehicle. 2. If after re-evaluation the noise is not corrected or if the inspection does not identify the root cause, replace the power steering pump with new P/N 20954812. This new pump is a 12 vane pump. Vehicles built after August 01, 2010, already have the new pump. Power Steering System Bleed Procedure 1. Apply the park brake. 2. Using a floor jack and jack stands, raise the front of the vehicle until the center of the front wheels are approximately 61 cm (24 in) off the ground. 3. Fill the power steering fluid reservoir with fluid to the bottom of the filler neck. Leave the cap off. Place towels around the reservoir as fluid will flow out from the reservoir onto the engine. 4. With the key in the ON position and with the engine OFF, turn the steering wheel from stop to stop until the fluid level maintains a consistent level and air bubbles becomes fewer within the reservoir (fluid will rise and fall while the steering wheel is turned. Trapped air will allow the fluid to fall. Maintain fluid level at all times). It may take several minutes to complete this process. 5. Ensure that the fluid level is at the bottom of the filler neck. 6. Connect the CH-43485 adapter to the GE-23738-A pump. 7. Hold the CH-43485 adapter on the top of the reservoir filler neck. 8. Apply a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi). 9. Set the GE-23738-A pump down. The vacuum will hold the CH-43485 adapter in place. Note The vacuum gauge needle will fluctuate while the steering wheel is moving. 10. Maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) while turning the steering wheel from stop to stop. Hold the steering wheel at each steering stop until air bubbles become fewer within the clear hose. Maintain fluid level at all times. It may take several minutes to complete this process. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > 10-02-32-002A > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Noise from Power Steering System > Page 883 11. With the steering wheel in the straight position, maintain a vacuum of 68 kPa (20 in Hg, 10 psi) for 5 minutes. 12. Inspect the condition of the fluid in the clear hose on the CH-43485 adapter. If any bubbles are in the fluid, repeat steps 10 and 11. 13. Lower the vehicle. 14. Relieve the vacuum in the GE-23738-A pump. 15. Remove the CH-43485 adapter from the reservoir filler neck. 16. Ensure that the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. 17. With the reservoir cap off, start the engine. Slowly rotate the steering wheel from stop to stop 10 times. Hold the steering wheel at each stop for 2 seconds. 18. Verify that the steering system does not shudder while turning the steering wheel. If the steering system exhibits a shudder condition, repeat steps 1 through 17. 19. Turn the engine OFF. 20. Ensure the power steering fluid level is at the MAX mark on the capstick fluid level indicator. Install the cap to the reservoir. 21. Test drive the vehicle. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the repair performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair Cross-Member: Service and Repair Radiator Crossmember Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement . 2. Tie the condenser radiator fan module to the upper bumper support. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 4. Remove the power steering cooler nuts (2). 5. Position the power steering cooler (1) securely out of the way. 6. Remove the lower 2 bolts from the upper bumper support. 7. Support the frame with a jack stand. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 888 8. Remove the front crossmember brace bolts (3). Note: When the frame insulator bolts are removed, always discard the bolts and replace with new bolts. 9. Remove the front frame to body bolts (2). 10. Remove the front crossmember brace (1). 11. Remove the radiator support bolts. 12. Remove the radiator support. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 889 1. Install the radiator support. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . 2. Install the radiator support bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 3. Install the front crossmember brace (1). Note: If the frame insulator bolt does not screw in smoothly, run a tap through the frame nut in the body in order to remove foreign material. Ensure the tap does not punch through the underbody. Do not over tighten the insulator. Over tightening may collapse a spacer or strip a bolt. 4. Install the front frame to body bolts (2). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 890 Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 5. Install the front crossmember brace bolts (3). Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 6. Remove the jack stand. 7. Install the lower 2 bolts to the upper bumper support. Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 8. Install the power steering cooler (1). 9. Install the power steering cooler nuts (2). 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Untie the condenser radiator fan module from the upper bumper support. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 891 12. Install the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair Front Subframe: Service and Repair Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Replacement Special Tools J-39580 - Engine Support Stand Removal Procedure 1. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture . 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove the front tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 4. Remove the left engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Splash Guard/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe. Refer to Exhaust Flexible Pipe Replacement . 6. Remove the propeller shaft if the vehicle is equipped with all wheel drive. Refer to Propeller Shaft Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 896 7. Remove both lower ball joint retaining nuts. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 8. Remove the lower ball joints from the steering knuckles. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 9. Disconnect the stabilizer shaft links from the stabilizer shaft. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement . 10. Remove the power steering gear heat shields. Refer to Steering Gear Heat Shield Replacement . Note: Whenever the steering gear is moved in relation to the body, disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. 11. Disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 12. Remove the power steering gear bolts. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement . 13. Remove the power steering gear from the frame. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement . 14. Use mechanics wire secure the power steering gear to the exhaust manifold. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 897 15. Remove the power steering cooler inlet pipe from the frame. Refer to Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement . 16. Remove and discard the engine and transmission mount lower nuts. 17. Lower the vehicle until the frame contacts the J 39580 . 18. Remove the underbody rear side rail. Refer to Underbody Rear Side Rail Replacement (). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 898 19. Remove the front crossmember brace bolts (3). Note: When the frame insulator bolts are removed, always discard the bolts and replace with new bolts. 20. Remove the front frame to body bolts (2). 21. Remove the front crossmember brace (1). 22. Remove the reinforcement bolts (2). 23. Remove the reinforcement studs (3). 24. Remove the frame to body bolts (4). 25. Remove the reinforcements (1). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 899 26. Raise the vehicle in order to separate the frame from the vehicle. 27. Remove the frame brace bolts. 28. Remove the frame brace. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 900 29. Remove the stabilizer shaft. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement . 30. Remove the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 31. Remove the frame insulators from the frame. Refer to Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Front Insulator Replacement (See: Front Subframe Mount/Service and Repair) and Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Rear Insulator Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Frame/Body / Frame Mount Bushing/Service and Repair). Installation Procedure 1. Install the frame insulators to the frame. Refer to Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Front Insulator Replacement (See: Front Subframe Mount/Service and Repair) and Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Rear Insulator Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Frame/Body / Frame Mount Bushing/Service and Repair). 2. Install the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 3. Install the stabilizer shaft. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 901 4. Install the frame brace. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . 5. Install the frame brace bolts and tighten to 60 Nm (44 lb ft). 6. Position the transmission table with the frame under the vehicle. Note: Ensure that the power steering cooler line does not become trapped by the engine mount during this step. 7. Lower the vehicle while aligning the powertrain mounts with the frame until the vehicle is close to the frame. Note: Ensure that the alignment pins remain installed during the frame installation. 8. Inserting two 19 mm (0.75 in) diameter X 203 mm (8.0 in) long guide pins or drill bits into the frame rear alignment holes in order to align the frame. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 902 9. Install the front crossmember brace (1). Note: If the frame insulator bolt does not screw in smoothly, run a tap through the frame nut in the body in order to remove foreign material. Ensure the tap does not punch through the underbody. Do not over tighten the insulator. Over tightening may collapse a spacer or strip a bolt. Note: The frame to body bolts are Torque-to-Yield fasteners and MUST be replaced after one use. 10. Install the NEW front frame to body bolts (2) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 11. Install the front crossmember brace bolts (3) and tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 12. Install the reinforcements (1). 13. Install the NEW rear frame to body bolts (4) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 14. Install the reinforcement bolts (2) and tighten to 60 Nm (44 lb ft). 15. Install the reinforcement studs (3) and tighten to 60 Nm (44 lb ft). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 903 16. Remove the alignment pins from the frame. 17. Install the underbody rear side rail. Refer to Underbody Rear Side Rail Replacement (). Note: The engine and transmission mount nuts must be replaced once removed. When the nut has to be loosened or removed, threadlocker must be used in addition to using a new nut. Allow adhesive on new engine and transmission mount nuts to cure for 24 hours after replacement. 18. Apply threadlocker GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) to the engine and transmission mount threads. 19. Install the engine and transmission mount nuts and tighten to 75 Nm (55 lb ft). 20. Install the power steering cooler inlet pipe to the frame. Refer to Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement . 21. Install the power steering gear to the frame. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement . 22. Install the power steering gear bolts. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement . 23. Install the power steering gear heat shield. Refer to Steering Gear Heat Shield Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 904 Note: Whenever the steering gear is moved in relation to the body, disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. 24. Disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 25. Connect the stabilizer shaft links to the stabilizer shaft. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement . 26. Install the lower ball joints to the steering knuckles. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 27. Install both lower ball joint retaining nuts. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 28. Install the propeller shaft if the vehicle is equipped with all wheel drive. Refer to Propeller Shaft Replacement . 29. Install the exhaust flexible pipe. Refer to Exhaust Flexible Pipe Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 905 30. Install the left engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement (See: Body and Frame/Splash Guard/Service and Repair). 31. Install the front tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 32. Lower the vehicle. 33. Remove the engine support fixture. 34. Inspect the front wheel alignment and adjust the toe angle if necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair Front Subframe Mount: Service and Repair Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Front Insulator Replacement Special Tools J 45725 - Frame Bushing Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . Note: Whenever the frame is moved in relation to the body, disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. 2. Disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 3. Install a jackstand under the center of the frame, between the front frame insulators. Note: In order to remove any frame insulator, loosen the adjacent frame insulator to permit the frame to separate from the body. Use caution when lowering or tilting the frame to prevent damage to other components. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 909 4. Remove the front crossmember brace bolts (3). Note: When the frame insulator bolts are removed, always discard the bolts and replace with new bolts. 5. Remove the front frame to body bolts (2). 6. Remove the crossmember brace (1). 7. Lower the front of the frame only enough to service the insulator, approximately 38 mm (1.5 in). 8. Remove the upper insulator. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 910 9. Remove the lower insulator using a flat chisel. Begin extracting the insulator by guiding the wedge of the chisel tip between the insulator flange lip and the vehicle frame. 10. Continue extracting the insulator until it is fully removed from the frame. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the frame insulator opening. 2. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the inside of the frame insulator opening. 3. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the frame insulator. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 911 4. Install clamp J 45725 - Installer onto the insulator about 1/8 inch from the top of the insulator. 5. Align the split of the insulator to the front of the frame. 6. Install J 45725 - Installer to the insulator and the frame. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 912 7. Using J 45725 - Installer install the insulator until the insulator is halfway recessed in the frame. 8. Remove only the clamp J 45725 - Installer. 9. Using J 45725 - Installer continue installing the insulator until the flange lip of the insulator is fully seated to the bottom of the frame. 10. Remove J 45725 - Installer from the insulator and the frame. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 913 11. Install the upper insulator. 12. Raise the front of the frame. 13. Install the front crossmember brace (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . Note: If the frame insulator bolt does not screw in smoothly, run a tap through the frame nut in the body in order to remove foreign material. Ensure the tap does not punch through the underbody. Do not over tighten the insulator. Over tightening may collapse a spacer or strip a bolt. 14. Install the front frame to body bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 15. Install the front crossmember brace bolts (3). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 914 Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 16. Remove the jackstand. 17. Connect the intermediate shaft to the steering gear stub shaft. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 18. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 3. Remove the muffler. Exhaust Muffler Replacement . 4. Remove the rear brake caliper bracket bolts. 5. Secure the rear brake caliper and bracket assemblies to the vehicle underbody. 6. Remove the park brake cables from the park brake cable equalizer and park brake cable bracket. Refer to Parking Brake Cable Equalizer Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 919 7. Remove the lower bolts from the rear shock absorbers. Refer to Shock Absorber Replacement . 8. Remove the rear suspension crossmember wire harness retainers from the vehicle underbody. 9. Disconnect the rear suspension crossmember wire harness from the vehicle body wire harness. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 920 10. Support the rear suspension crossmember with a suitable stand. 11. Remove the four bolts securing the rear suspension crossmember to vehicle. 12. With the aid of an assistant, carefully lower the rear suspension crossmember or raise the vehicle away from the rear suspension crossmember. 13. Remove the jounce bumpers and springs from the rear suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 921 14. Release the wire harness retainers from the rear suspension crossmember. 15. Disconnect the wire harness from the wheel speed sensors. 16. Remove the wire harness from the rear suspension crossmember. 17. Release the wheel speed wire harness retainers from the rear suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 922 18. Remove the right park brake cable retaining bolts from the rear suspension crossmember. 19. Remove the right park brake cable from the rear suspension crossmember. 20. Remove the remaining suspension components from the rear suspension crossmember: * Stabilizer shaft insulator brackets-Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement . * Upper control arm-Refer to Upper Control Arm Replacement . * Adjustment link-Refer to Adjust Link Replacement . * Lower control arm-Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . Installation Procedure Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 923 1. Install the following suspension components to the rear suspension crossmember: * Lower control arm-Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . * Adjustment link-Refer to Adjust Link Replacement . * Upper control arm-Refer to Upper Control Arm Replacement . * Stabilizer shaft insulator brackets-Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement . 2. Install the right park brake cable to the rear suspension crossmember. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . 3. Install the right park brake cable retaining bolts to the rear suspension crossmember. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 924 4. Install the wheel speed wire harness retainers to the rear suspension crossmember. 5. Install the wire harness to the rear suspension crossmember. 6. Attach the wire harness retainers to the rear suspension crossmember. 7. Connect the wire harness to the wheel speed sensors. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 925 8. Install the jounce bumpers and springs to the rear suspension crossmember. Refer to Rear Spring, Insulator, and Jounce Bumper Replacement for proper spring installation. 9. With the rear suspension crossmember mounted on a suitable stand and with the aid of an assistant, carefully lower the vehicle or raise the rear suspension crossmember into location on the vehicle. 10. Install the four bolts securing the rear suspension crossmember to vehicle. Tighten the bolts to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 926 11. Connect the rear suspension crossmember wire harness to the vehicle body wire harness. 12. Install the rear suspension crossmember wire harness retainers to the vehicle underbody. 13. Install the lower bolts to the rear shock absorbers. Refer to Shock Absorber Replacement . Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 927 14. Install the park brake cables to the park brake cable equalizer and park brake cable bracket. Refer to Parking Brake Cable Equalizer Replacement . 15. Install the rear brake caliper and bracket assemblies to the rear knuckles. 16. Install the rear brake caliper bracket bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 17. Install the muffler. Exhaust Muffler Replacement . 18. Install the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 19. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 928 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Support Lower Mount Replacement - Front Rear Suspension Support Lower Mount Replacement - Front Special Tools J 45725 - Frame Bushing Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 4. Remove the rear brake caliper bracket bolts. Note: Support the rear brake calipers from the vehicle body not the suspension to prevent stressing of the brake hoses. 5. Support the rear brake caliper. 6. Support the exhaust system on a suitable stand and disconnect the rubber insulator hangers from the exhaust system. 7. Lower the exhaust only enough to allow lowering of the suspension crossmember 38 mm (1.5 in). 8. Install jackstands under the front and rear of the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 929 Note: Both the front and rear of the suspension crossmember must be lowered equally to prevent over stressing the mounts. 9. Remove the suspension crossmember to body bolts. 10. Lower the suspension crossmember only enough to service the mount, approximately 38 mm (1.5 in). 11. Remove the upper mount. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 930 12. Remove the lower mount using a flat chisel. Begin extracting the mount by guiding the wedge of the chisel tip between the mount flange lip and the suspension crossmember. 13. Continue extracting the mount until it is fully removed from the suspension crossmember. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the frame mount opening. 2. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the inside of the suspension crossmember mount opening. 3. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the suspension crossmember mount. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 931 4. Install clamp J 45725 - Installer onto the mount about 1/8 inch from the top of the mount. 5. Align the split of the mount to the front of the suspension crossmember. 6. Install J 45725 Installer to the mount and the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 932 7. Using J 45725 - Installer install the mount until the mount is halfway recessed in the suspension crossmember. 8. Remove only the clamp J 45725 - Installer. 9. Using J 45725 - Installer continue installing the mount until the flange lip of the mount is fully seated to the bottom of the suspension crossmember. 10. Remove J 45725 - Installer from the mount and the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 933 11. Install the upper mount. 12. Raise the suspension crossmember. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . Note: If the suspension crossmember mount bolt does not screw in smoothly, run a tap through the frame crossmember nut in the body in order to remove foreign material. Ensure the tap does not punch through the underbody. Do not over tighten the body mount. Over tightening may collapse a spacer or strip a bolt. 13. Install the suspension crossmember to body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 14. Remove the jackstands. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 934 15. Install the rear brake caliper bracket and bolts. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement . 16. Install the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 17. Lower the vehicle. 18. Install the spare tire. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 935 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Support Lower Mount Replacement - Rear Rear Suspension Support Lower Mount Replacement - Rear Special Tools J 45725 - Frame Bushing Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 4. Remove the rear brake caliper bracket bolts. Note: Support the rear brake calipers from the vehicle body not the suspension to prevent stressing of the brake hoses. 5. Support the rear brake caliper. 6. Support the exhaust system on a suitable stand and disconnect the rubber insulator hangers from the exhaust system. 7. Lower the exhaust only enough to allow lowering of the suspension crossmember 38 mm (1.5 in). 8. Install jackstands under the front and rear of the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 936 Note: Both the front and rear of the suspension crossmember must be lowered equally to prevent over stressing the mounts. 9. Remove the suspension crossmember to body bolts. 10. Lower the suspension crossmember only enough to service the mount, approximately 38 mm (1.5 in). 11. Remove the upper mount. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 937 12. Remove the lower mount using a flat chisel. Begin extracting the mount by guiding the wedge of the chisel tip between the mount flange lip and the suspension crossmember. 13. Continue extracting the mount until it is fully removed from the suspension crossmember. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the frame mount opening. 2. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the inside of the suspension crossmember mount opening. 3. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the suspension crossmember mount. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 938 4. Install clamp J 45725 - Installer onto the mount about 1/8 inch from the top of the mount. 5. Align the split of the mount to the front of the suspension crossmember. 6. Install J 45725 Installer to the mount and the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 939 7. Using J 45725 - Installer install the mount until the mount is halfway recessed in the suspension crossmember. 8. Remove only the clamp J 45725 - Installer. 9. Using J 45725 - Installer continue installing the mount until the flange lip of the mount is fully seated to the bottom of the suspension crossmember. 10. Remove J 45725 - Installer from the mount and the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 940 11. Install the upper mount. 12. Raise the suspension crossmember. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . Note: If the suspension crossmember mount bolt does not screw in smoothly, run a tap through the frame crossmember nut in the body in order to remove foreign material. Ensure the tap does not punch through the underbody. Do not over tighten the body mount. Over tightening may collapse a spacer or strip a bolt. 13. Install the suspension crossmember to body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 14. Remove the jackstands. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 941 15. Install the rear brake caliper bracket and bolts. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement . 16. Install the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 17. Lower the vehicle. 18. Install the spare tire. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-03-08-004D > Nov > 10 > Suspension - Squawk/Creak Noise From Front of Vehicle Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Squawk/Creak Noise From Front of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-004D Date: November 05, 2010 Subject: Squawk or Creak Type Noise from Front of Vehicle (Apply Grease on Strut Piston Rod) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2007 and 2008 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-004C (Section 03 - Suspension ). Condition Some customers may comment on a squawk, creak or itch type noise coming from the front suspension of the vehicle that may be more noticeable in cold temperatures. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition at cold weather conditions may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction 1. Identify the noise at the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Important Take care not to damage the dust boot or mount cup during removal. 3. Pull the dust boot/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut mount jounce cup (1). 4. Slide the dust tube/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the piston rod (1). A long screwdriver or pry bar may be required to pop the dust boot/jounce bumper assembly from the mount cup. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the piston rod ONLY in the exposed area (to top 25 mm (1 in) of the piston rod, measured from bottom of mount cup). 6. Raise the dust tube/jounce bumper assembly up to the mount cup. 7. Rotate the dust tube/jounce bumper assembly on the piston rod to ensure grease is distributed around the rod. 8. Re-seat the dust tube/jounce bumper assembly into the mount cup. Note After installing the dust tube/jounce bumper, the vehicle should be driven over a road surface that will input sufficient jounce travel into the suspension, which will aid the dust tube/jounce bumper assembly into the mount cup (speed bump, driveway entrance, or other bump). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-03-08-004D > Nov > 10 > Suspension - Squawk/Creak Noise From Front of Vehicle > Page 950 Note For 2007-2008 model year vehicles built prior to March 01, 2008, if after performing the above repair the condition is still present, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-08-006B for additional information. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-03-08-004D > Nov > 10 > Suspension - Squawk/Creak Noise From Front of Vehicle Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Squawk/Creak Noise From Front of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-03-08-004D Date: November 05, 2010 Subject: Squawk or Creak Type Noise from Front of Vehicle (Apply Grease on Strut Piston Rod) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2007 and 2008 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-08-004C (Section 03 - Suspension ). Condition Some customers may comment on a squawk, creak or itch type noise coming from the front suspension of the vehicle that may be more noticeable in cold temperatures. This noise will most likely be heard during small to medium suspension travel. The noise may occur with the vehicle traveling straight and/or during turns. Cause The cause of this condition at cold weather conditions may be due to the inside diameter of the front strut jounce bumper rubbing against the piston rod of the strut, creating a slip-stick condition. Correction 1. Identify the noise at the upper strut mount area. The concern may be on both sides of the vehicle. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. Important Take care not to damage the dust boot or mount cup during removal. 3. Pull the dust boot/jounce bumper assembly out of the strut mount jounce cup (1). 4. Slide the dust tube/jounce bumper assembly down to expose the top portion of the piston rod (1). A long screwdriver or pry bar may be required to pop the dust boot/jounce bumper assembly from the mount cup. 5. Apply grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, 10953481), around the circumference of the piston rod ONLY in the exposed area (to top 25 mm (1 in) of the piston rod, measured from bottom of mount cup). 6. Raise the dust tube/jounce bumper assembly up to the mount cup. 7. Rotate the dust tube/jounce bumper assembly on the piston rod to ensure grease is distributed around the rod. 8. Re-seat the dust tube/jounce bumper assembly into the mount cup. Note After installing the dust tube/jounce bumper, the vehicle should be driven over a road surface that will input sufficient jounce travel into the suspension, which will aid the dust tube/jounce bumper assembly into the mount cup (speed bump, driveway entrance, or other bump). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-03-08-004D > Nov > 10 > Suspension - Squawk/Creak Noise From Front of Vehicle > Page 956 Note For 2007-2008 model year vehicles built prior to March 01, 2008, if after performing the above repair the condition is still present, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-08-006B for additional information. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 973 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 974 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 975 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 976 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 977 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 990 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 991 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 992 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 993 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 994 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 995 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 996 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 997 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 998 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 999 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1000 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1001 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1002 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1003 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1012 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1013 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1014 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 1019 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1024 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1025 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1026 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1032 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1033 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1034 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 1039 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1044 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1045 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 1046 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 1051 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1056 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1057 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 1058 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1064 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1065 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 1066 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 1071 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Air Filter: > 10-01-37-002 > Dec > 10 > A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle Cabin Air Filter: Customer Interest A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-01-37-002 Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle (Install Cabin Filter into HVAC Module) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Built Prior to October 11, 2010 Condition Some customers may comment on a gear oil type odor in the interior of the vehicle. The odor may be coming in through the air vents when the HVAC system is in the non-recirculation mode and can be misdiagnosed as an HVAC concern. The condition is most noticeable when the vehicle is idling at operating temperature after an extended drive. The odor will typically dissipate when the HVAC system is placed in the recirculation mode. Cause This condition may be caused by PTU (transfer case) fluid odor being pulled into the vehicle through the HVAC air inlet due to the location of the PTU vent. Correction To eliminate the odor, install a cabin charcoal filter into the HVAC module using the following procedure. 1. Remove the instrument panel compartment. Refer to the Instrument Panel Compartment Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Cut out the molded access panel on the HVAC module using the appropriate tool. 3. File down any rough edges to ensure a proper fit. 4. Install the filter element into the tray. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Air Filter: > 10-01-37-002 > Dec > 10 > A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle > Page 1081 5. Slide the tray into the HVAC module and press into position ensuring the four locking tabs are fully seated. 6. Remove any debris. 7. Install the instrument panel compartment. Refer to the Instrument Panel Compartment Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Air Filter: > 10-01-37-002 > Dec > 10 > A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle Cabin Air Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-01-37-002 Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle (Install Cabin Filter into HVAC Module) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Built Prior to October 11, 2010 Condition Some customers may comment on a gear oil type odor in the interior of the vehicle. The odor may be coming in through the air vents when the HVAC system is in the non-recirculation mode and can be misdiagnosed as an HVAC concern. The condition is most noticeable when the vehicle is idling at operating temperature after an extended drive. The odor will typically dissipate when the HVAC system is placed in the recirculation mode. Cause This condition may be caused by PTU (transfer case) fluid odor being pulled into the vehicle through the HVAC air inlet due to the location of the PTU vent. Correction To eliminate the odor, install a cabin charcoal filter into the HVAC module using the following procedure. 1. Remove the instrument panel compartment. Refer to the Instrument Panel Compartment Replacement procedure in SI. 2. Cut out the molded access panel on the HVAC module using the appropriate tool. 3. File down any rough edges to ensure a proper fit. 4. Install the filter element into the tray. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Air Filter: > 10-01-37-002 > Dec > 10 > A/C - Gear Oil Type Odor in Interior of Vehicle > Page 1087 5. Slide the tray into the HVAC module and press into position ensuring the four locking tabs are fully seated. 6. Remove any debris. 7. Install the instrument panel compartment. Refer to the Instrument Panel Compartment Replacement procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1088 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR FILTER The filter removes dust, pollen, and other airborne irritants from outside air and inside air when in recirculation mode. 1. Open the glove box. 2. Twist the compartment retainers (A) and pull outward to remove. 3. Lower the instrument panel compartment assembly (B) beyond the stops. 4. If needed, unsnap the instrument panel compartment assembly (B) from the instrument panel. When re-installing, be sure the instrument panel compartment dampener arm is aligned properly to the dampener gear assembly. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1089 5. Squeeze the housing cover (A) tabs to remove. 6. Remove the old air filter from the passenger compartment air filter housing (B). 7. Install the new air filter. 8. Replace the housing cover. 9. If removed, re-install the instrument panel compartment assembly. 10. Re-install the compartment retainers. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference > Page 1100 Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 1115 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 1124 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 1130 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt Seat Belt Extension: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-09-40-005F Date: June 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Belt Extender Availability Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009‐2011 model years and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-09-40-005E (Section 09 Restraints). Important: DO NOT use belt extenders when securing a child restraint. The seat and shoulder belt restraint systems used in all General Motors vehicles have sufficient belt length to accommodate most drivers and passengers. Consequently, requests for belt extensions (extenders) should be minimal. Seat belt extenders are available ONLY IN BLACK for most GM passenger cars and trucks produced in recent years. They are available in two different lengths, 23 cm (9 in) and 38 cm (15 in). They are designed to be coupled with the existing belts in each vehicle. When in use, the extender makes the belt arrangement a "custom fit" and use by anyone else or in another vehicle will lessen or nullify the protection offered by the vehicle's restraint system. For this reason, it is extremely important that the correct length extender be used for the vehicle and occupant intended. Important: Do not use an extender just to make it easier to buckle the safety belt. Use an extender only when you cannot buckle the safety belt without using an extender. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of extenders, see Extension Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate parts catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration catalog for the vehicle. U.S. Saab dealers should contact the Parts Help line. Canadian Saab dealers should fax requests to Partech Canada. Warranty Information ^ Seat belt extenders are a NO CHARGE item to all GM customers who request them for their specific vehicles. ^ Dealers should not be charging part costs since these extenders are supplied by GM to the dealers. ^ Dealers should not be charging labor costs since the extender can be customer installed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions Seat Belt Retractor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-09-40-002E Date: October 21, 2010 Subject: Safety Belt Locking Conditions (Normal Operating Characteristic) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-09-40-002D (Section 09 - Restraints). The purpose of this bulletin is to explain when the safety belts are supposed to lock. There are several different locking situations for both front and rear safety belts. Overspool Lock There is an unintentional locking condition that ALL safety belts from ALL manufacturers may experience called "overspool lock". If the webbing snaps back to the stowed position rapidly enough, the retractor will lock with the belt fully stowed. This is more likely to occur when customers "help" the belt to retract. Without the weight of the latch plate and friction to slow the retractive speed of the webbing, the higher than normal webbing retraction speed that occurs engages the locking mechanism when a sudden stop occurs at the end of web travel. Since the webbing is now fully loaded on the spool, the retractor cannot rewind itself further to release the locking mechanism. When this happens, the occupant cannot extract the belt to wear it. DO NOT replace the retractor for this condition until first attempting to disengage the locking mechanism by following the recommendation listed below. Recommendation Pull hard on the locked webbing and then release. The hard pull extracts a small amount of webbing from the retractor which, in turn, permits a small amount of retraction to occur when released. This is all that is needed to disengage the locking mechanism. The safety belt will now function properly. Vehicle Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the vehicle under the following conditions: - The vehicle changes speed or direction abruptly (the vehicle goes into rapid acceleration OR rapid deceleration or there is aggressive cornering). - It can also occur in a static condition when a vehicle is parked on a large slant (fore-aft or side-to-side), such as streets in San Francisco, California. - It may also occur over rough road conditions where the retractor mechanism is bounced into a locked condition. In all of these conditions, as long as tension is maintained on the webbing, the belt will stay locked. When the tension is released, the belt retracts slightly, the lock bar disengages and the safety belt should return to normal function. Please inform customers that may comment that "the belt locks intermittently" that this is the design intent and the belt is functioning properly. Web Sensing This type of locking occurs in response to the extraction of webbing. When the webbing reels out at an accelerated rate, it goes into lock mode and stays there until tension is again released. To observe this condition, extract the webbing quickly. Customers may refer to this condition as "intermittent lock-up" and encounter it when trying to put the belt on too quickly. Automatic Locking (ALR) When the webbing is pulled all the way out, it automatically converts the retractor into a cinch-down mode (i.e. ALR). This is typically used to tightly secure a child seat to the vehicle. Some customers may experience inadvertent activation of ALR mode if they happen to pull the belt all the way out to the end of travel while they are putting the belt on. The ALR mode of operation is automatically cancelled when the belt is unfastened and stowed (the belt returns to normal sensitive function). Corvette only - This locking mechanism is also provided at the driver's position of the Corvette only, as a unique feature. Corvette customers may find this feature appealing when they plan to operate the vehicle in a "spirited" manner (such as driving in mountainous terrain). With the ALR active, the operator is snugly cinched into the seat and kept firmly in place during high G-force driving maneuvers. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint System - Normal Safety Belt Locking Conditions > Page 1139 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-007D Date: January 28, 2011 Subject: Passenger Presence System (PPS) May Command Passenger Airbag Indicator and Seat Belt Reminder On When Electronic Devices (Computers, MP3 Players, Cell Phones, Diagnostic Scan Tool, etc.) Are Placed on Front Passenger Seat, DTCs 5045, B0074 0F, B101D or B0081 Set Models: 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac SRX 2009-2011 Chevrolet Cobalt (except SS model), HHR (except SS model), Impala, Traverse 2010-2011 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2010-2011 GMC Terrain 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2010 Saturn VUE ' Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-007C (Section 09 - Restraints). Dealers should be aware that when certain electronic devices (computers, MP3 players, cell phones, Tech 2(R), etc.) are placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag indicator may illuminate. The seat belt reminder light/chime may also be activated. This is due to the fact that some electronic devices placed on the front passenger seat may interfere with the electric field generated by the PPS system, causing it to enable (turn ON) the passenger airbag and turn on the safety belt reminder light and chime - even though the seat is not occupied. The electronic device does not necessarily need to be turned on to cause this condition. DTCs 5045, B0081 0F, B0074 0F or B101D may set depending on the vehicle. If you remove the electronic device from the front passenger seat, the DTC will go into history. If this happens, clear all SDM and PPS DTCs. If the DTC is still current, follow the service procedure in SI for that DTC. If the DTCs do not return, no repair is needed (do not replace any parts for this condition). Note Never rest the diagnostic scan tool or components on the passenger front seat or touch the passenger front seat while the diagnostic scan tool is in contact with your body. This may cause the SIR lamp to illuminate while holding the diagnostic scan tool because your body can transfer the electronic "noise" to the sensor mat in the passenger front seat. Please advise the customer to avoid placing the electronic device in the front passenger seat in the future. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraint Systems - Accessory Electrical Interference > Page 1145 Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-08-52-001G > Aug > 10 > Keyless Entry - Intermittent/Inoperative Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter: Customer Interest Keyless Entry - Intermittent/Inoperative Remote TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-001G Date: August 24, 2010 Subject: EI08028 - Intermittent, Inoperative Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (Reprogram Key Fobs) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Sierra Denali, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the labor operation number. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-52-001F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that one or more key fobs are inoperative. A number of warranty claims have been submitted that show relearning the key fobs has corrected this concern. Cause Based on technician feedback, engineering has determined two possible causes for key fob concerns: - The fobs may not be programmed when the vehicles leave the plant. - There may be Issues with the fobs internal components. Correction To correct the customer's concern, reprogram the transmitter (key fob). Refer to the procedure for Transmitter Programming found in Service Information. If reprogramming the transmitter is not successful, it will be necessary to replace the transmitter. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-08-52-001G > Aug > 10 > Keyless Entry - Intermittent/Inoperative Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter: All Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Intermittent/Inoperative Remote TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-001G Date: August 24, 2010 Subject: EI08028 - Intermittent, Inoperative Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (Reprogram Key Fobs) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Sierra Denali, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the labor operation number. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-52-001F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that one or more key fobs are inoperative. A number of warranty claims have been submitted that show relearning the key fobs has corrected this concern. Cause Based on technician feedback, engineering has determined two possible causes for key fob concerns: - The fobs may not be programmed when the vehicles leave the plant. - There may be Issues with the fobs internal components. Correction To correct the customer's concern, reprogram the transmitter (key fob). Refer to the procedure for Transmitter Programming found in Service Information. If reprogramming the transmitter is not successful, it will be necessary to replace the transmitter. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Striker: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1167 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1168 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1169 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1170 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1176 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1177 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1178 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1179 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Cellular Phone: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 1188 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 1194 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 1203 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 1209 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface Information Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-013C Date: October 05, 2010 Subject: Information on USB Command and Control Multimedia Player Interface/List of Supported Devices Models: 2010-2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade Models, SRX 2009-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2009-2011 Chevrolet HHR, Malibu 2010-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Camaro, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, Traverse 2011 Chevrolet Cruze 2010-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Terrain, Yukon 2009-2010 Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice, Solstice Coupe 2009-2010 Saturn AURA, SKY 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK All Equipped with Convenience and Connectivity Package - RPOs KTA, KTB, SRJ, U4H, UUI, UUJ, UUM, UUN, U2S, U2X, U2Y, UAV, UYZ, UY5 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-013B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). USB Radio and MP3 Functionality The USB (Universal Serial Bus) will be a USB 2.0 port on the radio faceplate, on the IP or in the center console. This interface will give the customer the additional functionality of iPod/MP3 command and control. Customers now have full radio control of the iPod/MP3 audio files via the USB cable. A single USB connection allows digital audio transferring from the iPod to the radio. The customer will also have playback capability with a USB memory stick (only MP3 and WMA files). Note Not all memory sticks are supported. Customers have full radio control of the iPod/MP3 audio files via the USB cable. A single USB connection allows digital audio transferring from the iPod to the radio. The iPod will be charging while connected to the radio. Note Video from the iPod is NOT capable of being transferred to a Navigation radio display. For the Chevrolet Cobalt, HHR and Malibu; Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice; and Saturn AURA, SKY, the USB port is on the faceplate of the radio. For all other models, it is located in the center console or IP. For the Cadillac CTS only, a special iPod cable (USB and AUX cable) is needed. This special cable comes delivered with the vehicle. In all cases, the iPod will be charging while connected to the radio through the USB port when the vehicle is running or the RPA is active. Problems with iPod Not Connecting If the infotainment system does not operate properly when using a device connected through the USB port, this may be due to an incompatible media device. Important DO NOT replace the radio or multimedia interface module due to a customer device incompatibility issue. Verify the customer's media device is validated for this system using the list below. If the customer's device is a validated device for this system, follow the SI diagnostic procedure to isolate the fault. If the customer's device is not on the validated device list, explain to the customer that their particular unit is not compatible with the system. Troubleshooting Tips for iPod Devices Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface Information > Page 1215 1. Check the version of the iPod/MP3 to confirm that it is supported. 2. Unplug and Re-insert the iPod to verify the customer complaint. 3. Verify the battery charge of the iPod. A low battery condition on the iPod may not allow it to connect to the radio. The iPod may need to be charged before it can be controlled by the radio. 4. If the customer receives a "Device Not Supported" message on their radio or is having general iPod/MP3 connection issues (and they have a supported device), they may need to reset their iPod. To reset the iPod: - For the iPod Nanos and Classic , Toggle the Hold switch on and off. (Slide it to Hold, then turn it off again. Press and hold the Menu and Center (Select) buttons simultaneously until the Apple logo appears, about 6 to 8 seconds. You may need to repeat this step. - For the iPod Touch and iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few seconds until the red slider appears, then slide the slider. 5. Have the customer check their cable for quality. - Aftermarket cables can wear from use. The customer may need to purchase a new USB cable. - Verify that cable extensions are not present. The extra capacitance may cause too large a signal drop for the iPod to communicate with the radio. 6. If the customer receives a "Device Not Supported" message on their radio with an iPod connected (and they have a supported device), the customer may need to download the latest firmware from the Apple website (Please visit www.apple.com for more information). Validated Apple Device - Both Charge/Support Digital Audio (For All RPOs) For further information on identifying iPod models, please visit http://support.apple.com/kb/ht1353 Other Validated Device- Both Charge/Support Digital Audio for Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox Only (RPO KTA or KTB) Important: Must be set to MTP (Mass Transfer Protocol) in the MP3 Player device setting. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface Information > Page 1216 Important These devices (and additional MP3 players) may be capable of connecting to the other USB options by internally setting the MP3 device to MSC (Mass Storage Class) mode. In this mode, the USB port will see the device as a flash drive. Please have the customer refer to their MP3 device manual on how to set the device to MSC. If the device is not able to be set to MSC, the customer must use the AUX jack. Note MTP mode must be used in order to transfer ANY Digital Rights Management (DRM) protected content. Non-Validated Apple Device Important The devices above are NOT supported by USB interface. Apple does not support digital media transfer from these devices through the USB port. The customer can still listen to their older iPod on vehicle by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface Information > Page 1217 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Global Positioning System: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 1226 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 1232 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Display: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes Navigation Display: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-002G Date: August 23, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Black or Blank Screen, Radio Reset, Map Screen Stops Updating or Freezes, Voice Recognition Inoperative, Dead Battery (Update Navigation Radio Calibration and/or Software) Models: 2009 Buick Lucerne 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009 Cadillac Escalade 2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2009 Pontiac Torrent 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK, VUE Equipped with Navigation Radio RPO U3R, UZR, U3U, UUM or U4H Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add radio RPOs and remove both the Attention statement and the radio part number identification table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-002F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: Condition 1 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models: - Intermittent blank or black screen occurring with XM traffic alerts. - Map screen freezes or stops updating while driving. - Navigation radio resets upon startup, due to Language selection changes on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Condition 2 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models except the Cadillac Escalade: - Abnormal Rear Park Assist Chime operation, which may result in a dead battery. - Intermittent blank or black screen at start-up or while driving. - Intermittent blank or black screen when shifting from reverse to drive. - Radio appears to turn on twice at engine start by showing the splash screen 2 times. - Radio changes to FM after engine start when radio was previously tuned to XM. - Radio momentarily stops/locks up while reading the Map Disc. - Voice recognition is intermittently inoperative. Note If the following condition is observed, disconnect the negative battery cable in order to reset the radio, prior to programming the radio with the updated software. - Radio is inoperative or unresponsive to button press and has a black or blank screen. Cause These conditions may be caused by a software anomaly. Correction Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Display: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1242 Important Before proceeding with the update, advise the customer that the Address Book, Previous Destination data, and Preset data may be removed during the SW update. The user will have to input this data when the update is complete. Important - Do not eject the disc during the update. - Do not turn the ignition off or remove power to the radio during the update. - Do not leave the disc in the radio after the update. Do not give the disc to the customer. The software update disc may be used to update more than one vehicle. Condition 1 For these conditions, follow this procedure: Technicians are to update the navigation radio software using a software update disc, P/N 20884820. The software update disc is to be obtained from the GM Navigation Disc Center, using the GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information below. Navigation Radio Software Update for Cadillac Escalade Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the CONFIG and SEEK buttons (2) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (1), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version is 101F or higher (e.g.101H), the radio has the latest navigation software available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software update. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Display: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1243 4. Eject the map disc from the top map DVD slot (3) by pressing the EJECT button, if the disc is installed. Load the software update disc, P/N 20884820, into the top map DVD slot (3). 5. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 6. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the top map DVD slot. After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 7. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 101F, using the procedure outlined in step 2 above. 8. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 9. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Conditions 1 and 2 For these conditions, follow both of the 2 procedures. Navigation Radio Calibration and Software Update for All Other Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed after the opening screen has appeared. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the MENU and SEEK UP buttons (1) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (2), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. The Radio Calibration will be the two characters (3) as indicated in the above illustration. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version (2) is version 102C or higher (e.g.102D), and the radio calibration (3) is 40 or higher, the radio has the latest navigation software and calibration available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software and radio calibration versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software and calibration update. 4. A revised radio software calibration has been released to address these conditions. Reprogram the radio using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. 5. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Display: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1244 6. Open the front display by pressing and holding the EJECT button (1) for approximately 15 seconds. Eject the map disc from the revealed map DVD slot by pressing the EJECT button (2) located beneath the revealed map DVD slot (3). Load the software update disc, P/N 20990141, into the map DVD slot (3). 7. Do not push on the touch screen to close it. Close the front display by using both hands at the four corners of the display until the display fits securely into the radio. 8. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 9. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the map DVD slot (3). After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 10. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 102C, using the procedure outlined in Step 2. 11. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 12. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Parts Information Navigation software update discs are for the dealer to update the Navigation Radio software only. They DO NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. Do not give the software update disc to the customer. Navigation software discs may be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). Refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012E for additional information on how to obtain AVN software update discs. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information - Via the telephone at 1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) - When calling the Navigation Disc Center for software update discs, provide the 5 digit dealer code so the order can be processed correctly. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Display: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1245 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Display: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes Navigation Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-002G Date: August 23, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Black or Blank Screen, Radio Reset, Map Screen Stops Updating or Freezes, Voice Recognition Inoperative, Dead Battery (Update Navigation Radio Calibration and/or Software) Models: 2009 Buick Lucerne 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009 Cadillac Escalade 2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2009 Pontiac Torrent 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK, VUE Equipped with Navigation Radio RPO U3R, UZR, U3U, UUM or U4H Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add radio RPOs and remove both the Attention statement and the radio part number identification table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-002F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: Condition 1 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models: - Intermittent blank or black screen occurring with XM traffic alerts. - Map screen freezes or stops updating while driving. - Navigation radio resets upon startup, due to Language selection changes on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Condition 2 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models except the Cadillac Escalade: - Abnormal Rear Park Assist Chime operation, which may result in a dead battery. - Intermittent blank or black screen at start-up or while driving. - Intermittent blank or black screen when shifting from reverse to drive. - Radio appears to turn on twice at engine start by showing the splash screen 2 times. - Radio changes to FM after engine start when radio was previously tuned to XM. - Radio momentarily stops/locks up while reading the Map Disc. - Voice recognition is intermittently inoperative. Note If the following condition is observed, disconnect the negative battery cable in order to reset the radio, prior to programming the radio with the updated software. - Radio is inoperative or unresponsive to button press and has a black or blank screen. Cause These conditions may be caused by a software anomaly. Correction Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Display: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1251 Important Before proceeding with the update, advise the customer that the Address Book, Previous Destination data, and Preset data may be removed during the SW update. The user will have to input this data when the update is complete. Important - Do not eject the disc during the update. - Do not turn the ignition off or remove power to the radio during the update. - Do not leave the disc in the radio after the update. Do not give the disc to the customer. The software update disc may be used to update more than one vehicle. Condition 1 For these conditions, follow this procedure: Technicians are to update the navigation radio software using a software update disc, P/N 20884820. The software update disc is to be obtained from the GM Navigation Disc Center, using the GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information below. Navigation Radio Software Update for Cadillac Escalade Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the CONFIG and SEEK buttons (2) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (1), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version is 101F or higher (e.g.101H), the radio has the latest navigation software available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software update. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Display: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1252 4. Eject the map disc from the top map DVD slot (3) by pressing the EJECT button, if the disc is installed. Load the software update disc, P/N 20884820, into the top map DVD slot (3). 5. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 6. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the top map DVD slot. After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 7. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 101F, using the procedure outlined in step 2 above. 8. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 9. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Conditions 1 and 2 For these conditions, follow both of the 2 procedures. Navigation Radio Calibration and Software Update for All Other Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed after the opening screen has appeared. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the MENU and SEEK UP buttons (1) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (2), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. The Radio Calibration will be the two characters (3) as indicated in the above illustration. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version (2) is version 102C or higher (e.g.102D), and the radio calibration (3) is 40 or higher, the radio has the latest navigation software and calibration available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software and radio calibration versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software and calibration update. 4. A revised radio software calibration has been released to address these conditions. Reprogram the radio using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. 5. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Display: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1253 6. Open the front display by pressing and holding the EJECT button (1) for approximately 15 seconds. Eject the map disc from the revealed map DVD slot by pressing the EJECT button (2) located beneath the revealed map DVD slot (3). Load the software update disc, P/N 20990141, into the map DVD slot (3). 7. Do not push on the touch screen to close it. Close the front display by using both hands at the four corners of the display until the display fits securely into the radio. 8. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 9. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the map DVD slot (3). After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 10. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 102C, using the procedure outlined in Step 2. 11. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 12. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Parts Information Navigation software update discs are for the dealer to update the Navigation Radio software only. They DO NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. Do not give the software update disc to the customer. Navigation software discs may be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). Refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012E for additional information on how to obtain AVN software update discs. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information - Via the telephone at 1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) - When calling the Navigation Disc Center for software update discs, provide the 5 digit dealer code so the order can be processed correctly. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Display: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1254 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-002G Date: August 23, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Black or Blank Screen, Radio Reset, Map Screen Stops Updating or Freezes, Voice Recognition Inoperative, Dead Battery (Update Navigation Radio Calibration and/or Software) Models: 2009 Buick Lucerne 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009 Cadillac Escalade 2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2009 Pontiac Torrent 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK, VUE Equipped with Navigation Radio RPO U3R, UZR, U3U, UUM or U4H Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add radio RPOs and remove both the Attention statement and the radio part number identification table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-002F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: Condition 1 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models: - Intermittent blank or black screen occurring with XM traffic alerts. - Map screen freezes or stops updating while driving. - Navigation radio resets upon startup, due to Language selection changes on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Condition 2 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models except the Cadillac Escalade: - Abnormal Rear Park Assist Chime operation, which may result in a dead battery. - Intermittent blank or black screen at start-up or while driving. - Intermittent blank or black screen when shifting from reverse to drive. - Radio appears to turn on twice at engine start by showing the splash screen 2 times. - Radio changes to FM after engine start when radio was previously tuned to XM. - Radio momentarily stops/locks up while reading the Map Disc. - Voice recognition is intermittently inoperative. Note If the following condition is observed, disconnect the negative battery cable in order to reset the radio, prior to programming the radio with the updated software. - Radio is inoperative or unresponsive to button press and has a black or blank screen. Cause These conditions may be caused by a software anomaly. Correction Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1263 Important Before proceeding with the update, advise the customer that the Address Book, Previous Destination data, and Preset data may be removed during the SW update. The user will have to input this data when the update is complete. Important - Do not eject the disc during the update. - Do not turn the ignition off or remove power to the radio during the update. - Do not leave the disc in the radio after the update. Do not give the disc to the customer. The software update disc may be used to update more than one vehicle. Condition 1 For these conditions, follow this procedure: Technicians are to update the navigation radio software using a software update disc, P/N 20884820. The software update disc is to be obtained from the GM Navigation Disc Center, using the GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information below. Navigation Radio Software Update for Cadillac Escalade Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the CONFIG and SEEK buttons (2) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (1), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version is 101F or higher (e.g.101H), the radio has the latest navigation software available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software update. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1264 4. Eject the map disc from the top map DVD slot (3) by pressing the EJECT button, if the disc is installed. Load the software update disc, P/N 20884820, into the top map DVD slot (3). 5. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 6. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the top map DVD slot. After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 7. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 101F, using the procedure outlined in step 2 above. 8. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 9. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Conditions 1 and 2 For these conditions, follow both of the 2 procedures. Navigation Radio Calibration and Software Update for All Other Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed after the opening screen has appeared. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the MENU and SEEK UP buttons (1) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (2), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. The Radio Calibration will be the two characters (3) as indicated in the above illustration. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version (2) is version 102C or higher (e.g.102D), and the radio calibration (3) is 40 or higher, the radio has the latest navigation software and calibration available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software and radio calibration versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software and calibration update. 4. A revised radio software calibration has been released to address these conditions. Reprogram the radio using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. 5. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1265 6. Open the front display by pressing and holding the EJECT button (1) for approximately 15 seconds. Eject the map disc from the revealed map DVD slot by pressing the EJECT button (2) located beneath the revealed map DVD slot (3). Load the software update disc, P/N 20990141, into the map DVD slot (3). 7. Do not push on the touch screen to close it. Close the front display by using both hands at the four corners of the display until the display fits securely into the radio. 8. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 9. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the map DVD slot (3). After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 10. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 102C, using the procedure outlined in Step 2. 11. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 12. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Parts Information Navigation software update discs are for the dealer to update the Navigation Radio software only. They DO NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. Do not give the software update disc to the customer. Navigation software discs may be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). Refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012E for additional information on how to obtain AVN software update discs. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information - Via the telephone at 1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) - When calling the Navigation Disc Center for software update discs, provide the 5 digit dealer code so the order can be processed correctly. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1266 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-002G Date: August 23, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Black or Blank Screen, Radio Reset, Map Screen Stops Updating or Freezes, Voice Recognition Inoperative, Dead Battery (Update Navigation Radio Calibration and/or Software) Models: 2009 Buick Lucerne 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009 Cadillac Escalade 2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2009 Pontiac Torrent 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK, VUE Equipped with Navigation Radio RPO U3R, UZR, U3U, UUM or U4H Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add radio RPOs and remove both the Attention statement and the radio part number identification table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-002F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: Condition 1 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models: - Intermittent blank or black screen occurring with XM traffic alerts. - Map screen freezes or stops updating while driving. - Navigation radio resets upon startup, due to Language selection changes on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Condition 2 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models except the Cadillac Escalade: - Abnormal Rear Park Assist Chime operation, which may result in a dead battery. - Intermittent blank or black screen at start-up or while driving. - Intermittent blank or black screen when shifting from reverse to drive. - Radio appears to turn on twice at engine start by showing the splash screen 2 times. - Radio changes to FM after engine start when radio was previously tuned to XM. - Radio momentarily stops/locks up while reading the Map Disc. - Voice recognition is intermittently inoperative. Note If the following condition is observed, disconnect the negative battery cable in order to reset the radio, prior to programming the radio with the updated software. - Radio is inoperative or unresponsive to button press and has a black or blank screen. Cause These conditions may be caused by a software anomaly. Correction Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1272 Important Before proceeding with the update, advise the customer that the Address Book, Previous Destination data, and Preset data may be removed during the SW update. The user will have to input this data when the update is complete. Important - Do not eject the disc during the update. - Do not turn the ignition off or remove power to the radio during the update. - Do not leave the disc in the radio after the update. Do not give the disc to the customer. The software update disc may be used to update more than one vehicle. Condition 1 For these conditions, follow this procedure: Technicians are to update the navigation radio software using a software update disc, P/N 20884820. The software update disc is to be obtained from the GM Navigation Disc Center, using the GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information below. Navigation Radio Software Update for Cadillac Escalade Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the CONFIG and SEEK buttons (2) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (1), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version is 101F or higher (e.g.101H), the radio has the latest navigation software available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software update. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1273 4. Eject the map disc from the top map DVD slot (3) by pressing the EJECT button, if the disc is installed. Load the software update disc, P/N 20884820, into the top map DVD slot (3). 5. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 6. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the top map DVD slot. After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 7. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 101F, using the procedure outlined in step 2 above. 8. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 9. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Conditions 1 and 2 For these conditions, follow both of the 2 procedures. Navigation Radio Calibration and Software Update for All Other Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed after the opening screen has appeared. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the MENU and SEEK UP buttons (1) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (2), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. The Radio Calibration will be the two characters (3) as indicated in the above illustration. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version (2) is version 102C or higher (e.g.102D), and the radio calibration (3) is 40 or higher, the radio has the latest navigation software and calibration available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software and radio calibration versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software and calibration update. 4. A revised radio software calibration has been released to address these conditions. Reprogram the radio using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. 5. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1274 6. Open the front display by pressing and holding the EJECT button (1) for approximately 15 seconds. Eject the map disc from the revealed map DVD slot by pressing the EJECT button (2) located beneath the revealed map DVD slot (3). Load the software update disc, P/N 20990141, into the map DVD slot (3). 7. Do not push on the touch screen to close it. Close the front display by using both hands at the four corners of the display until the display fits securely into the radio. 8. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 9. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the map DVD slot (3). After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 10. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 102C, using the procedure outlined in Step 2. 11. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 12. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Parts Information Navigation software update discs are for the dealer to update the Navigation Radio software only. They DO NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. Do not give the software update disc to the customer. Navigation software discs may be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). Refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012E for additional information on how to obtain AVN software update discs. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information - Via the telephone at 1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) - When calling the Navigation Disc Center for software update discs, provide the 5 digit dealer code so the order can be processed correctly. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1275 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-002G Date: August 23, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Black or Blank Screen, Radio Reset, Map Screen Stops Updating or Freezes, Voice Recognition Inoperative, Dead Battery (Update Navigation Radio Calibration and/or Software) Models: 2009 Buick Lucerne 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009 Cadillac Escalade 2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2009 Pontiac Torrent 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK, VUE Equipped with Navigation Radio RPO U3R, UZR, U3U, UUM or U4H Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add radio RPOs and remove both the Attention statement and the radio part number identification table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-002F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: Condition 1 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models: - Intermittent blank or black screen occurring with XM traffic alerts. - Map screen freezes or stops updating while driving. - Navigation radio resets upon startup, due to Language selection changes on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Condition 2 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models except the Cadillac Escalade: - Abnormal Rear Park Assist Chime operation, which may result in a dead battery. - Intermittent blank or black screen at start-up or while driving. - Intermittent blank or black screen when shifting from reverse to drive. - Radio appears to turn on twice at engine start by showing the splash screen 2 times. - Radio changes to FM after engine start when radio was previously tuned to XM. - Radio momentarily stops/locks up while reading the Map Disc. - Voice recognition is intermittently inoperative. Note If the following condition is observed, disconnect the negative battery cable in order to reset the radio, prior to programming the radio with the updated software. - Radio is inoperative or unresponsive to button press and has a black or blank screen. Cause These conditions may be caused by a software anomaly. Correction Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1284 Important Before proceeding with the update, advise the customer that the Address Book, Previous Destination data, and Preset data may be removed during the SW update. The user will have to input this data when the update is complete. Important - Do not eject the disc during the update. - Do not turn the ignition off or remove power to the radio during the update. - Do not leave the disc in the radio after the update. Do not give the disc to the customer. The software update disc may be used to update more than one vehicle. Condition 1 For these conditions, follow this procedure: Technicians are to update the navigation radio software using a software update disc, P/N 20884820. The software update disc is to be obtained from the GM Navigation Disc Center, using the GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information below. Navigation Radio Software Update for Cadillac Escalade Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the CONFIG and SEEK buttons (2) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (1), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version is 101F or higher (e.g.101H), the radio has the latest navigation software available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software update. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1285 4. Eject the map disc from the top map DVD slot (3) by pressing the EJECT button, if the disc is installed. Load the software update disc, P/N 20884820, into the top map DVD slot (3). 5. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 6. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the top map DVD slot. After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 7. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 101F, using the procedure outlined in step 2 above. 8. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 9. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Conditions 1 and 2 For these conditions, follow both of the 2 procedures. Navigation Radio Calibration and Software Update for All Other Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed after the opening screen has appeared. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the MENU and SEEK UP buttons (1) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (2), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. The Radio Calibration will be the two characters (3) as indicated in the above illustration. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version (2) is version 102C or higher (e.g.102D), and the radio calibration (3) is 40 or higher, the radio has the latest navigation software and calibration available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software and radio calibration versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software and calibration update. 4. A revised radio software calibration has been released to address these conditions. Reprogram the radio using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. 5. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1286 6. Open the front display by pressing and holding the EJECT button (1) for approximately 15 seconds. Eject the map disc from the revealed map DVD slot by pressing the EJECT button (2) located beneath the revealed map DVD slot (3). Load the software update disc, P/N 20990141, into the map DVD slot (3). 7. Do not push on the touch screen to close it. Close the front display by using both hands at the four corners of the display until the display fits securely into the radio. 8. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 9. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the map DVD slot (3). After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 10. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 102C, using the procedure outlined in Step 2. 11. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 12. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Parts Information Navigation software update discs are for the dealer to update the Navigation Radio software only. They DO NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. Do not give the software update disc to the customer. Navigation software discs may be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). Refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012E for additional information on how to obtain AVN software update discs. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information - Via the telephone at 1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) - When calling the Navigation Disc Center for software update discs, provide the 5 digit dealer code so the order can be processed correctly. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1287 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-08-44-034E > Feb > 11 > Navigation Radio - Various Noises Explained Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Various Noises Explained INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-44-034E Date: February 11, 2011 Subject: Information on Noise Sources from Navigation Radio - CD/DVD Disc Accessing Noise from Radio Fan, for Cooling, Disc Accessing Noise for Navigation Operation or NAV Traffic Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2009 Cadillac SRX 2007-2011 Cadillac DTS, Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali XL 2007-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-034D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Some customers may comment that there are unusual fan type noises coming from the navigation radio. Additionally, the customer may comment on radio noise coming from the CD/DVD or MAP disc mechanisms when CDs/DVDs or MAP discs are present in the CD mechanisms. Some customers have mentioned that radio noise is present when the customer enters the vehicle or that the noise continues after they shut the vehicle off and open the door to leave the vehicle. This noise has been described as a fan sound or hearing a disc spinning. Source of fan sound - It is normal for the radio fan to run when the vehicle is turned on and for up to three minutes after the vehicle has been turned off and the driver's door has been opened or closed. Disc spinning sound - This is a normal operational sound. This is caused by the map disc spinning behind the tilt screen. It is a normal operation after the RKE is used to unlock the vehicle or when the driver's door has been opened. This noise will also be heard during vehicle operation and up to three minutes after the vehicle has been turned off and driver's door has been opened and closed. MAP Disc Accessing "ZIP" sound - As the Navigation Radio accesses the MAP Disc, the customer may describe frequent "zip" type noises. This noise is caused by the CD Read Lens moving across the disc to access needed data for proper MAP display. To determine if the source of the noise is from accessing the MAP Disc, remove the MAP Disc to determine if the noise continues. With the addition of the Real Time NAV Traffic Feature, the MAP CD may be accessed to a greater extent thus resulting in additional MAP Drive noise. Inform the customer about these noises. If the customer believes the noise is not normal, compare the condition to a like vehicle with identical settings to determine if there is a noticeable difference. Do not replace the radio as the described conditions are normal operating characteristics. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-08-44-006 > Oct > 10 > Navigation - Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation - Report Missing/Inaccurate Nav. Map Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-44-006 Date: October 11, 2010 Subject: Reporting Missing or Inaccurate Navigation Radio Map Disc Information - Complete and Submit Feedback Form at GM Navigation Disc Center Website Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Navigation Radio Some customers may notice that some navigation radio map discs may have missing or incorrect information. The following list contains some examples: - Missing or incorrect roads, road names or road shapes - Missing or incorrect addresses - Missing or incorrect highway labeling - Missing or incorrect highway exit numbers - Missing or incorrect traffic restrictions - Missing points of interest (POI) or incorrect details, such as location, category or phone number General Motors uses a map database from two different suppliers. The two map suppliers are consistently updating their map database and will gladly accept any input regarding missing or incorrect information on the navigation radio map disc. To report any missing or incorrect information, please access the GM Navigation Disc Center at the following web site: http://www.gmnavdisc.com. At the GM Navigation Disc Center home page, select the tab: Your Feedback. In the Navigation Data Feedback form, fill in the appropriate information as required and then select: Submit, to send the form. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-013C > Oct > 10 > Audio System USB/Multimedia Interface Information Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - USB/Multimedia Interface Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-013C Date: October 05, 2010 Subject: Information on USB Command and Control Multimedia Player Interface/List of Supported Devices Models: 2010-2011 Buick Enclave, LaCrosse 2008-2011 Cadillac CTS 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade Models, SRX 2009-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2009-2011 Chevrolet HHR, Malibu 2010-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Camaro, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, Traverse 2011 Chevrolet Cruze 2010-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Terrain, Yukon 2009-2010 Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice, Solstice Coupe 2009-2010 Saturn AURA, SKY 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK All Equipped with Convenience and Connectivity Package - RPOs KTA, KTB, SRJ, U4H, UUI, UUJ, UUM, UUN, U2S, U2X, U2Y, UAV, UYZ, UY5 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-013B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). USB Radio and MP3 Functionality The USB (Universal Serial Bus) will be a USB 2.0 port on the radio faceplate, on the IP or in the center console. This interface will give the customer the additional functionality of iPod/MP3 command and control. Customers now have full radio control of the iPod/MP3 audio files via the USB cable. A single USB connection allows digital audio transferring from the iPod to the radio. The customer will also have playback capability with a USB memory stick (only MP3 and WMA files). Note Not all memory sticks are supported. Customers have full radio control of the iPod/MP3 audio files via the USB cable. A single USB connection allows digital audio transferring from the iPod to the radio. The iPod will be charging while connected to the radio. Note Video from the iPod is NOT capable of being transferred to a Navigation radio display. For the Chevrolet Cobalt, HHR and Malibu; Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice; and Saturn AURA, SKY, the USB port is on the faceplate of the radio. For all other models, it is located in the center console or IP. For the Cadillac CTS only, a special iPod cable (USB and AUX cable) is needed. This special cable comes delivered with the vehicle. In all cases, the iPod will be charging while connected to the radio through the USB port when the vehicle is running or the RPA is active. Problems with iPod Not Connecting If the infotainment system does not operate properly when using a device connected through the USB port, this may be due to an incompatible media device. Important DO NOT replace the radio or multimedia interface module due to a customer device incompatibility issue. Verify the customer's media device is validated for this system using the list below. If the customer's device is a validated device for this system, follow the SI diagnostic procedure to isolate the fault. If the customer's device is not on the validated device list, explain to the customer that their particular unit is not compatible with the system. Troubleshooting Tips for iPod Devices Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-013C > Oct > 10 > Audio System USB/Multimedia Interface Information > Page 1301 1. Check the version of the iPod/MP3 to confirm that it is supported. 2. Unplug and Re-insert the iPod to verify the customer complaint. 3. Verify the battery charge of the iPod. A low battery condition on the iPod may not allow it to connect to the radio. The iPod may need to be charged before it can be controlled by the radio. 4. If the customer receives a "Device Not Supported" message on their radio or is having general iPod/MP3 connection issues (and they have a supported device), they may need to reset their iPod. To reset the iPod: - For the iPod Nanos and Classic , Toggle the Hold switch on and off. (Slide it to Hold, then turn it off again. Press and hold the Menu and Center (Select) buttons simultaneously until the Apple logo appears, about 6 to 8 seconds. You may need to repeat this step. - For the iPod Touch and iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few seconds until the red slider appears, then slide the slider. 5. Have the customer check their cable for quality. - Aftermarket cables can wear from use. The customer may need to purchase a new USB cable. - Verify that cable extensions are not present. The extra capacitance may cause too large a signal drop for the iPod to communicate with the radio. 6. If the customer receives a "Device Not Supported" message on their radio with an iPod connected (and they have a supported device), the customer may need to download the latest firmware from the Apple website (Please visit www.apple.com for more information). Validated Apple Device - Both Charge/Support Digital Audio (For All RPOs) For further information on identifying iPod models, please visit http://support.apple.com/kb/ht1353 Other Validated Device- Both Charge/Support Digital Audio for Buick LaCrosse, Chevrolet Camaro, Equinox Only (RPO KTA or KTB) Important: Must be set to MTP (Mass Transfer Protocol) in the MP3 Player device setting. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-013C > Oct > 10 > Audio System USB/Multimedia Interface Information > Page 1302 Important These devices (and additional MP3 players) may be capable of connecting to the other USB options by internally setting the MP3 device to MSC (Mass Storage Class) mode. In this mode, the USB port will see the device as a flash drive. Please have the customer refer to their MP3 device manual on how to set the device to MSC. If the device is not able to be set to MSC, the customer must use the AUX jack. Note MTP mode must be used in order to transfer ANY Digital Rights Management (DRM) protected content. Non-Validated Apple Device Important The devices above are NOT supported by USB interface. Apple does not support digital media transfer from these devices through the USB port. The customer can still listen to their older iPod on vehicle by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-013C > Oct > 10 > Audio System USB/Multimedia Interface Information > Page 1303 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-002G Date: August 23, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Black or Blank Screen, Radio Reset, Map Screen Stops Updating or Freezes, Voice Recognition Inoperative, Dead Battery (Update Navigation Radio Calibration and/or Software) Models: 2009 Buick Lucerne 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009 Cadillac Escalade 2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2009 Pontiac Torrent 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK, VUE Equipped with Navigation Radio RPO U3R, UZR, U3U, UUM or U4H Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add radio RPOs and remove both the Attention statement and the radio part number identification table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-002F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: Condition 1 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models: - Intermittent blank or black screen occurring with XM traffic alerts. - Map screen freezes or stops updating while driving. - Navigation radio resets upon startup, due to Language selection changes on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Condition 2 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models except the Cadillac Escalade: - Abnormal Rear Park Assist Chime operation, which may result in a dead battery. - Intermittent blank or black screen at start-up or while driving. - Intermittent blank or black screen when shifting from reverse to drive. - Radio appears to turn on twice at engine start by showing the splash screen 2 times. - Radio changes to FM after engine start when radio was previously tuned to XM. - Radio momentarily stops/locks up while reading the Map Disc. - Voice recognition is intermittently inoperative. Note If the following condition is observed, disconnect the negative battery cable in order to reset the radio, prior to programming the radio with the updated software. - Radio is inoperative or unresponsive to button press and has a black or blank screen. Cause These conditions may be caused by a software anomaly. Correction Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1308 Important Before proceeding with the update, advise the customer that the Address Book, Previous Destination data, and Preset data may be removed during the SW update. The user will have to input this data when the update is complete. Important - Do not eject the disc during the update. - Do not turn the ignition off or remove power to the radio during the update. - Do not leave the disc in the radio after the update. Do not give the disc to the customer. The software update disc may be used to update more than one vehicle. Condition 1 For these conditions, follow this procedure: Technicians are to update the navigation radio software using a software update disc, P/N 20884820. The software update disc is to be obtained from the GM Navigation Disc Center, using the GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information below. Navigation Radio Software Update for Cadillac Escalade Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the CONFIG and SEEK buttons (2) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (1), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version is 101F or higher (e.g.101H), the radio has the latest navigation software available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software update. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1309 4. Eject the map disc from the top map DVD slot (3) by pressing the EJECT button, if the disc is installed. Load the software update disc, P/N 20884820, into the top map DVD slot (3). 5. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 6. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the top map DVD slot. After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 7. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 101F, using the procedure outlined in step 2 above. 8. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 9. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Conditions 1 and 2 For these conditions, follow both of the 2 procedures. Navigation Radio Calibration and Software Update for All Other Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed after the opening screen has appeared. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the MENU and SEEK UP buttons (1) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (2), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. The Radio Calibration will be the two characters (3) as indicated in the above illustration. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version (2) is version 102C or higher (e.g.102D), and the radio calibration (3) is 40 or higher, the radio has the latest navigation software and calibration available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software and radio calibration versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software and calibration update. 4. A revised radio software calibration has been released to address these conditions. Reprogram the radio using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. 5. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1310 6. Open the front display by pressing and holding the EJECT button (1) for approximately 15 seconds. Eject the map disc from the revealed map DVD slot by pressing the EJECT button (2) located beneath the revealed map DVD slot (3). Load the software update disc, P/N 20990141, into the map DVD slot (3). 7. Do not push on the touch screen to close it. Close the front display by using both hands at the four corners of the display until the display fits securely into the radio. 8. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 9. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the map DVD slot (3). After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 10. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 102C, using the procedure outlined in Step 2. 11. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 12. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Parts Information Navigation software update discs are for the dealer to update the Navigation Radio software only. They DO NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. Do not give the software update disc to the customer. Navigation software discs may be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). Refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012E for additional information on how to obtain AVN software update discs. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information - Via the telephone at 1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) - When calling the Navigation Disc Center for software update discs, provide the 5 digit dealer code so the order can be processed correctly. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1311 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1317 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1318 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1319 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1320 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1326 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1327 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1328 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1329 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 1339 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 1345 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-002G Date: August 23, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Black or Blank Screen, Radio Reset, Map Screen Stops Updating or Freezes, Voice Recognition Inoperative, Dead Battery (Update Navigation Radio Calibration and/or Software) Models: 2009 Buick Lucerne 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009 Cadillac Escalade 2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2009 Pontiac Torrent 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK, VUE Equipped with Navigation Radio RPO U3R, UZR, U3U, UUM or U4H Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add radio RPOs and remove both the Attention statement and the radio part number identification table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-002F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: Condition 1 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models: - Intermittent blank or black screen occurring with XM traffic alerts. - Map screen freezes or stops updating while driving. - Navigation radio resets upon startup, due to Language selection changes on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Condition 2 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models except the Cadillac Escalade: - Abnormal Rear Park Assist Chime operation, which may result in a dead battery. - Intermittent blank or black screen at start-up or while driving. - Intermittent blank or black screen when shifting from reverse to drive. - Radio appears to turn on twice at engine start by showing the splash screen 2 times. - Radio changes to FM after engine start when radio was previously tuned to XM. - Radio momentarily stops/locks up while reading the Map Disc. - Voice recognition is intermittently inoperative. Note If the following condition is observed, disconnect the negative battery cable in order to reset the radio, prior to programming the radio with the updated software. - Radio is inoperative or unresponsive to button press and has a black or blank screen. Cause These conditions may be caused by a software anomaly. Correction Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1354 Important Before proceeding with the update, advise the customer that the Address Book, Previous Destination data, and Preset data may be removed during the SW update. The user will have to input this data when the update is complete. Important - Do not eject the disc during the update. - Do not turn the ignition off or remove power to the radio during the update. - Do not leave the disc in the radio after the update. Do not give the disc to the customer. The software update disc may be used to update more than one vehicle. Condition 1 For these conditions, follow this procedure: Technicians are to update the navigation radio software using a software update disc, P/N 20884820. The software update disc is to be obtained from the GM Navigation Disc Center, using the GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information below. Navigation Radio Software Update for Cadillac Escalade Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the CONFIG and SEEK buttons (2) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (1), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version is 101F or higher (e.g.101H), the radio has the latest navigation software available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software update. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1355 4. Eject the map disc from the top map DVD slot (3) by pressing the EJECT button, if the disc is installed. Load the software update disc, P/N 20884820, into the top map DVD slot (3). 5. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 6. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the top map DVD slot. After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 7. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 101F, using the procedure outlined in step 2 above. 8. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 9. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Conditions 1 and 2 For these conditions, follow both of the 2 procedures. Navigation Radio Calibration and Software Update for All Other Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed after the opening screen has appeared. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the MENU and SEEK UP buttons (1) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (2), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. The Radio Calibration will be the two characters (3) as indicated in the above illustration. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version (2) is version 102C or higher (e.g.102D), and the radio calibration (3) is 40 or higher, the radio has the latest navigation software and calibration available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software and radio calibration versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software and calibration update. 4. A revised radio software calibration has been released to address these conditions. Reprogram the radio using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. 5. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1356 6. Open the front display by pressing and holding the EJECT button (1) for approximately 15 seconds. Eject the map disc from the revealed map DVD slot by pressing the EJECT button (2) located beneath the revealed map DVD slot (3). Load the software update disc, P/N 20990141, into the map DVD slot (3). 7. Do not push on the touch screen to close it. Close the front display by using both hands at the four corners of the display until the display fits securely into the radio. 8. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 9. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the map DVD slot (3). After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 10. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 102C, using the procedure outlined in Step 2. 11. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 12. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Parts Information Navigation software update discs are for the dealer to update the Navigation Radio software only. They DO NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. Do not give the software update disc to the customer. Navigation software discs may be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). Refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012E for additional information on how to obtain AVN software update discs. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information - Via the telephone at 1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) - When calling the Navigation Disc Center for software update discs, provide the 5 digit dealer code so the order can be processed correctly. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1357 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-44-002G Date: August 23, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Black or Blank Screen, Radio Reset, Map Screen Stops Updating or Freezes, Voice Recognition Inoperative, Dead Battery (Update Navigation Radio Calibration and/or Software) Models: 2009 Buick Lucerne 2009-2011 Buick Enclave 2009 Cadillac Escalade 2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2009-2011 GMC Acadia 2009 Pontiac Torrent 2009-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK, VUE Equipped with Navigation Radio RPO U3R, UZR, U3U, UUM or U4H Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add radio RPOs and remove both the Attention statement and the radio part number identification table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-44-002F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on one or more of the following conditions: Condition 1 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models: - Intermittent blank or black screen occurring with XM traffic alerts. - Map screen freezes or stops updating while driving. - Navigation radio resets upon startup, due to Language selection changes on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Condition 2 The following conditions may occur on all of the above mentioned models except the Cadillac Escalade: - Abnormal Rear Park Assist Chime operation, which may result in a dead battery. - Intermittent blank or black screen at start-up or while driving. - Intermittent blank or black screen when shifting from reverse to drive. - Radio appears to turn on twice at engine start by showing the splash screen 2 times. - Radio changes to FM after engine start when radio was previously tuned to XM. - Radio momentarily stops/locks up while reading the Map Disc. - Voice recognition is intermittently inoperative. Note If the following condition is observed, disconnect the negative battery cable in order to reset the radio, prior to programming the radio with the updated software. - Radio is inoperative or unresponsive to button press and has a black or blank screen. Cause These conditions may be caused by a software anomaly. Correction Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1363 Important Before proceeding with the update, advise the customer that the Address Book, Previous Destination data, and Preset data may be removed during the SW update. The user will have to input this data when the update is complete. Important - Do not eject the disc during the update. - Do not turn the ignition off or remove power to the radio during the update. - Do not leave the disc in the radio after the update. Do not give the disc to the customer. The software update disc may be used to update more than one vehicle. Condition 1 For these conditions, follow this procedure: Technicians are to update the navigation radio software using a software update disc, P/N 20884820. The software update disc is to be obtained from the GM Navigation Disc Center, using the GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information below. Navigation Radio Software Update for Cadillac Escalade Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the CONFIG and SEEK buttons (2) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (1), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version is 101F or higher (e.g.101H), the radio has the latest navigation software available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software update. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1364 4. Eject the map disc from the top map DVD slot (3) by pressing the EJECT button, if the disc is installed. Load the software update disc, P/N 20884820, into the top map DVD slot (3). 5. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 6. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the top map DVD slot. After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 7. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 101F, using the procedure outlined in step 2 above. 8. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 9. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Conditions 1 and 2 For these conditions, follow both of the 2 procedures. Navigation Radio Calibration and Software Update for All Other Models 1. Start the engine with the gear shift in PARK, and wait until the audio or navigation screen is displayed after the opening screen has appeared. 2. Proceed to the FM audio screen and confirm the current navigation software version by pressing the MENU and SEEK UP buttons (1) simultaneously as indicated in the above illustration. If the screen switches, select FM to display the software version. Performing this operation may take a couple of attempts for the radio to detect the simultaneous button press. The navigation software version will be the first four characters (2), reading from the left of the display, that is located in the middle of the screen. The Radio Calibration will be the two characters (3) as indicated in the above illustration. Record all information shown for later reference. 3. If the navigation software version (2) is version 102C or higher (e.g.102D), and the radio calibration (3) is 40 or higher, the radio has the latest navigation software and calibration available and no update is necessary. However, if the string of letters across the screen is not alphanumeric, this indicates an internal communication problem with the radio. For this condition, refer to SI. For all other navigation software and radio calibration versions proceed to step 4 to continue the software and calibration update. 4. A revised radio software calibration has been released to address these conditions. Reprogram the radio using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. 5. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1365 6. Open the front display by pressing and holding the EJECT button (1) for approximately 15 seconds. Eject the map disc from the revealed map DVD slot by pressing the EJECT button (2) located beneath the revealed map DVD slot (3). Load the software update disc, P/N 20990141, into the map DVD slot (3). 7. Do not push on the touch screen to close it. Close the front display by using both hands at the four corners of the display until the display fits securely into the radio. 8. The display will show "Update in Progress" and upon a successful software update, the screen will transition to a blue screen with "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message displayed on the screen. It will take approximately five minutes to load the new software. 9. When "The disc installed is not a MAP DVD" message is displayed on the screen, eject the software update disc from the map DVD slot (3). After this software update, the disc may be used again on another vehicle. Retain the disc at the dealership. 10. Confirm that the new navigation software version is 102C, using the procedure outlined in Step 2. 11. Install the customer's original map disc if it was present. 12. Verify the proper operation of the Navigation Radio. Parts Information Navigation software update discs are for the dealer to update the Navigation Radio software only. They DO NOT update or replace the navigation map disc that is supplied with the vehicle. Please order these parts only as needed. There is a limited supply of these discs available. Do not order these discs for stock. Do not give the software update disc to the customer. Navigation software discs may be used to reprogram more than one vehicle. The first update disc for each P/N is free. Subsequent copies of the same P/N for the same dealer will cost $50 (USD). Refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-44-012E for additional information on how to obtain AVN software update discs. GM Navigation Disc Center Contact Information - Via the telephone at 1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) - When calling the Navigation Disc Center for software update discs, provide the 5 digit dealer code so the order can be processed correctly. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-44-002G > Aug > 10 > Navigation Radio - Blank Screen/Screen Freezes > Page 1366 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Heated Glass Element: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 1372 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 1373 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 1374 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 1380 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 1381 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 1382 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1391 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1392 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1393 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1399 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1400 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1401 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1410 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1411 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1412 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1418 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1419 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 1420 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Trailer And RV Towing Information Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Trailer And RV Towing Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-00-89-021H Date: August 24, 2010 Subject: Supplemental Information on Trailer Towing and Recreational Vehicle Towing (Dinghy Towing) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to provide two dinghy towing procedures based on the model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-00-89-021G (Section 00 - General Information). The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealers of special procedures necessary when towing a trailer or when towing the vehicle behind a recreational vehicle. Towing a Trailer Trailer Weight Information The following chart shows how much the trailer can weigh, based on the vehicle powertrain combination and whether the vehicle is equipped with Trailer Provision (RPO V92). Retailers should refer customers to the appropriate Owner Manual for important trailering tips, vehicle maintenance, and safety rules before towing a trailer. Towing a Trailer with a Vehicle without Trailer Provisions (RPO V92) These vehicles must be modified by installing a new underhood bussed electrical center (UBEC) to provide full functionality for 4 circuits: ground, tail lamps, RH and LH stop/turn lamps. Perform this modification only if the customers will be using the vehicle to tow. The replacement of the UBEC remains the best solution to upgrade the vehicles wiring for towing. The electrical circuitry for the tail/stop lamps is controlled by the BCM and splicing into the body harness is not recommended. Towing a Trailer with a Vehicle with Trailer Provisions (RPO V92) It is necessary to modify the backup lamp circuit. Perform this procedure only if the customer will be using the vehicle to tow. 1. Disconnect the X7 connector from the Body Control Module (BCM). 2. Remove the terminal for pin 3 from the BCM X7 connector. The wire to this terminal is dark blue and is the 38 circuit. 3. Re-connect the X7 connector to the BCM. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Trailer And RV Towing Information > Page 1426 4. Cut the terminal off the end of this wire and strip the end of the wire. 5. Splice this wire into the 24 circuit wire that goes into BCM connector X6, pin 2. The 24 circuit is light green. Recreational Vehicle Towing (Dinghy Towing) Recreational Vehicle Towing Information Important Vehicles that are "dinghy towed" must be started at the beginning of each day and at each fuel stop for a minimum of five minutes. Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle - such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as "dinghy towing" (towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and "dolly towing" (towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a "dolly"). With the proper preparation and equipment, many vehicles can be towed in these ways. Refer to the appropriate model/model year Owner Manual for towing preparation guidelines and dolly and dinghy towing procedures. The Towing Chart below summarizes powertrain combination compatibility with dolly and dinghy towing methods. *Caution These vehicle can be dinghy towed from the front for unlimited miles at 65 mph (105 km/h). To avoid vehicle damage, never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing these vehicles. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. **Caution Dolly towing an all-wheel drive vehicle may result in premature failure of the rear drive module. Dinghy Towing Procedure (2007-2008 Model Year) Caution If you tow your vehicle without performing each of the steps listed under "Dinghy Towing," you could damage the automatic transmission. Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing procedure prior to and after towing your vehicle. Caution Don't tow a vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a compact spare tire. Towing with two different tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause severe damage to the transmission. Important All-wheel drive vehicles may only be dinghy towed from the front, with all four wheels on the ground. 1. Position the vehicle to tow. Shift the transmission to PARK (P) and turn the ignition to OFF. 2. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY. 5. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N). 6. To prevent your battery from draining while the vehicle is being towed, remove the 50 amp BATT1 fuse (1) in the UBEC and store in a safe Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Trailer And RV Towing Information > Page 1427 location. 7. Release the parking brake. Once you have reached your destination, do the following steps: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Reinstall the BATT1 fuse. 3. Shift the transmission to PARK (P), turn the ignition key to OFF and remove the key from the ignition. 4. Release the parking brake. Dinghy Towing Procedure (2009-2011 Model Year) Caution If you tow your vehicle without performing each of the steps listed under "Dinghy Towing," you could damage the automatic transmission. Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing procedure prior to and after towing your vehicle. Caution Don't tow a vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a compact spare tire. Towing with two different tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause severe damage to the transmission. Important All-wheel drive vehicles may only be dinghy towed from the front, with all four wheels on the ground. 1. Position the vehicle to tow. Shift the transmission to PARK (P) and turn the ignition to OFF. 2. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY. 5. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N). Important The fuses must be removed in the order specified. 6. Remove the 15 amp ECM fuse (1) in the UBEC and store in a safe location. 7. To prevent your battery from draining while the vehicle is being towed, remove the 50 amp BATT1 fuse (2) in the UBEC and store in a safe location. 8. Release the parking brake. Once you have reached your destination, do the following steps: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Reinstall the BATT1 fuse. 3. Reinstall the ECM fuse. 4. Shift the transmission to PARK (P), turn the ignition key to OFF and remove the key from the ignition. 5. Release the parking brake. Parts Information For part numbers and usage of the UBEC, see Group 02.483 of the appropriate Parts Catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration Catalog for the vehicle. Order the UBEC with the same option content including RPO V92. Warranty Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Trailer And RV Towing Information > Page 1428 Please advise the customer that the installation and cost of the new underhood bussed electrical center (UBEC) will not be covered under the vehicle's warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Trailer Hitch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Disconnect the body wire harness (2) from the trailer wire harness connector (1). 3. If replacing the trailer hitch, remove the trailer wire harness connector (1) from the trailer hitch (2). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1432 4. If necessary, lower the exhaust system by serrating the rubber insulators from the exhaust underbody hangers (1. 2, and 3). 5. Remove the trailer hitch bolts (2-4). 6. Remove the trailer hitch (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1433 1. Install the trailer hitch (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . 2. Install the trailer hitch bolts (2-4). Tighten the bolts to 100 Nm (74 lb ft). 3. If necessary raise the exhaust system by installing the rubber insulators to the exhaust underbody hangers (1. 2, and 3). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1434 4. If previously removed, install the trailer wire harness connector (1) to the trailer hitch (2). 5. Connect the body wire harness (2) to the trailer wire harness connector (1). 6. lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement > Page 1442 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Fascia Headlamp Opening Flange Support Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Headlamp Opening Flange Support Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement > Page 1443 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Fascia Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement > Page 1444 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement > Page 1445 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Headlamp Opening Flange Support Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Headlamp Opening Flange Support Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement > Page 1446 Front Bumper Fascia Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement > Page 1447 Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement Front Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement > Page 1448 Front Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Bracket Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement > Page 1449 Front Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement Front Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement > Page 1450 Front Bumper Fascia Upper Support Replacement Front Bumper Fascia Upper Support Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement > Page 1451 Radiator Grille Support Reinforcement Replacement Radiator Grille Support Reinforcement Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Fascia Brace Replacement > Page 1452 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Front Bumper Impact Bar Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement > Page 1461 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Reinforcement Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Reinforcement Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement > Page 1462 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement > Page 1463 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement > Page 1464 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Reinforcement Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Reinforcement Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement > Page 1465 Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement > Page 1466 Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Reflector Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement > Page 1467 Rear Bumper Fascia Support Replacement Rear Bumper Fascia Support Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement > Page 1468 Rear Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement Rear Bumper Upper Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement > Page 1469 Rear Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement Rear Bumper Lower Fascia Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia Insert Replacement > Page 1470 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Impact Bar Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Front Side Door Upper Hinge and Lower Hinge Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 1484 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Opening Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Opening Weatherstrip Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door sill plate. Refer to Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement . 2. Remove the weatherstrip (1) from the pinch-weld flange (2). Installation Procedure 1. Align the weatherstrip to the door opening with the bond joint positioned at the lower center of the door opening. 2. Install the weatherstrip to the pinch-weld flange. Ensure the weatherstrip is fully seated. 3. Install the front door sill plate. Refer to Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 1485 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Front Door Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Hinge: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Upper Hinge and Lower Hinge Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Starting at the bottom of the sealing strip, pull the sealing strip away from the door pinch-weld flange. 2. Lift upward in order to remove the upper portion of the sealing strip from the door pinch-weld flange. 3. Remove the sealing strip from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Starting at the top of the sealing strip, insert the sealing strip tab into the door sheet metal. 2. Position the sealing strip to the door pinch-weld flange and apply pressure in order to seat the sealing strip. 3. Ensure that the sealing strip is fully seated against the pinch-weld flange. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement > Page 1498 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement > Page 1499 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Opening Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Door Opening Weatherstrip Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door sill plate. Refer to Rear Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement . 2. Remove the weatherstrip (1) from the pinch-weld flange. Installation Procedure 1. Align the weatherstrip (1) to the door opening with the bond joint positioned at the lower center of the door opening. 2. Install the weatherstrip to the pinch-weld flange. Ensure the weatherstrip is fully seated. 3. Install the rear door sill plate. Refer to Rear Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement > Page 1500 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Door: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Filler Door Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Hinge: Service and Repair Hood Hinge Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Insulator / Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Insulator / Pad: Service and Repair Hood Insulator Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Primary and Secondary Latch Replacement Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Primary and Secondary Latch Replacement Hood Primary and Secondary Latch Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Primary and Secondary Latch Replacement > Page 1515 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Support Replacement Hood Latch Support Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Replacement > Page 1520 Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Handle Replacement Hood Primary Latch Release Cable Handle Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Shock / Support: Service and Repair Hood Strut Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Rear Outer Seal Replacement Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Rear Outer Seal Replacement Hood Rear Outer Seal Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Rear Outer Seal Replacement > Page 1528 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Front Weatherstrip Replacement Hood Front Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Rear Outer Seal Replacement > Page 1529 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1539 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1540 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1541 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1542 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1548 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1549 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1550 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1551 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1560 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1561 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1562 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1563 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1569 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1570 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1571 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1572 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Hinge: Service and Repair Liftgate Hinge Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1584 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1585 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1586 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1587 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1593 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1594 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1595 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1596 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1605 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1606 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1607 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1608 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1614 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1615 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1616 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1617 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1618 Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Liftgate Strut Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1627 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1628 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1629 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1630 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Striker: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1636 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1637 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1638 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1639 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheelhouse Front Liner Replacement Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front Wheelhouse Front Liner Replacement Front Wheelhouse Front Liner Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheelhouse Front Liner Replacement > Page 1649 Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front Wheelhouse Rear Liner Replacement Front Wheelhouse Rear Liner Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Rear Fender > Rear Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Fender Liner: Service and Repair Rear Wheelhouse Panel Liner Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Rear Insulator Replacement Special Tools J 45725 - Frame Bushing Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . Note: Whenever the frame is moved in relation to the body, disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. 2. Disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 3. Install a jackstand under the center of the frame, between the rear frame insulators. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1658 Note: In order to remove any frame insulator, loosen the adjacent frame insulator to permit the frame to separate from the body. Use caution when lowering or tilting the frame to prevent damage to other components. 4. Remove the reinforcement bolts (2). 5. Remove the reinforcement studs (3). Note: When the frame insulator bolts are removed, always discard the bolts and replace with new bolts. 6. Remove the frame to body bolts (4). 7. Remove the reinforcements (1). 8. Lower the rear of the frame only enough to service the insulator, approximately 38 mm (1.5 in). 9. Remove the upper insulator. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1659 10. Remove the lower insulator using a flat chisel. Begin extracting the insulator by guiding the wedge of the chisel tip between the insulator flange lip and the vehicle frame. 11. Continue extracting the insulator until it is fully removed from the frame. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the frame insulator opening. 2. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the inside of the frame insulator opening. 3. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the frame insulator. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1660 4. Install clamp J 45725 - Installer onto the insulator about 1/8 inch from the top of the insulator. 5. Align the split of the insulator to the front of the frame. 6. Install J 45725 - Installer to the insulator and the frame. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1661 7. Using J 45725 - Installer install the insulator until the insulator is halfway recessed in the frame. 8. Remove only the clamp J 45725 - Installer. 9. Using J 45725 - Installer continue installing the insulator until the flange lip of the insulator is fully seated to the bottom of the frame. 10. Remove J 45725 - Installer from the insulator and the frame. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1662 11. Install the upper insulator. 12. Raise the rear of the frame. 13. Install the reinforcements (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . Note: If the frame insulator bolt does not screw in smoothly, run a tap through the frame nut in the body in order to remove foreign material. Ensure the tap does not punch through the underbody. Do not over tighten the insulator. Over tightening may collapse a spacer or strip a bolt. 14. Install the rear frame to body bolts (4). Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 15. Install the reinforcement bolts (2). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1663 Tighten the bolt to 60 Nm (44 lb ft). 16. Install the reinforcement studs (3). Tighten the stud to 60 Nm (44 lb ft). 17. Remove the jackstand. 18. Connect the intermediate shaft to the steering gear stub shaft. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 19. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair Cross-Member: Service and Repair Radiator Crossmember Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement . 2. Tie the condenser radiator fan module to the upper bumper support. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 4. Remove the power steering cooler nuts (2). 5. Position the power steering cooler (1) securely out of the way. 6. Remove the lower 2 bolts from the upper bumper support. 7. Support the frame with a jack stand. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1667 8. Remove the front crossmember brace bolts (3). Note: When the frame insulator bolts are removed, always discard the bolts and replace with new bolts. 9. Remove the front frame to body bolts (2). 10. Remove the front crossmember brace (1). 11. Remove the radiator support bolts. 12. Remove the radiator support. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1668 1. Install the radiator support. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . 2. Install the radiator support bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 3. Install the front crossmember brace (1). Note: If the frame insulator bolt does not screw in smoothly, run a tap through the frame nut in the body in order to remove foreign material. Ensure the tap does not punch through the underbody. Do not over tighten the insulator. Over tightening may collapse a spacer or strip a bolt. 4. Install the front frame to body bolts (2). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1669 Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 5. Install the front crossmember brace bolts (3). Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 6. Remove the jack stand. 7. Install the lower 2 bolts to the upper bumper support. Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 8. Install the power steering cooler (1). 9. Install the power steering cooler nuts (2). 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Untie the condenser radiator fan module from the upper bumper support. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1670 12. Install the front bumper fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Structural Brace > Component Information > Service and Repair > Frame Brace Replacement Structural Brace: Service and Repair Frame Brace Replacement Frame Brace Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Structural Brace > Component Information > Service and Repair > Frame Brace Replacement > Page 1675 Structural Brace: Service and Repair Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Reinforcement Replacement Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Reinforcement Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair Front Subframe: Service and Repair Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Replacement Special Tools J-39580 - Engine Support Stand Removal Procedure 1. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture . 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove the front tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 4. Remove the left engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement (See: Splash Guard/Service and Repair). 5. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe. Refer to Exhaust Flexible Pipe Replacement . 6. Remove the propeller shaft if the vehicle is equipped with all wheel drive. Refer to Propeller Shaft Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1680 7. Remove both lower ball joint retaining nuts. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 8. Remove the lower ball joints from the steering knuckles. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 9. Disconnect the stabilizer shaft links from the stabilizer shaft. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement . 10. Remove the power steering gear heat shields. Refer to Steering Gear Heat Shield Replacement . Note: Whenever the steering gear is moved in relation to the body, disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. 11. Disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 12. Remove the power steering gear bolts. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement . 13. Remove the power steering gear from the frame. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement . 14. Use mechanics wire secure the power steering gear to the exhaust manifold. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1681 15. Remove the power steering cooler inlet pipe from the frame. Refer to Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement . 16. Remove and discard the engine and transmission mount lower nuts. 17. Lower the vehicle until the frame contacts the J 39580 . 18. Remove the underbody rear side rail. Refer to Underbody Rear Side Rail Replacement (). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1682 19. Remove the front crossmember brace bolts (3). Note: When the frame insulator bolts are removed, always discard the bolts and replace with new bolts. 20. Remove the front frame to body bolts (2). 21. Remove the front crossmember brace (1). 22. Remove the reinforcement bolts (2). 23. Remove the reinforcement studs (3). 24. Remove the frame to body bolts (4). 25. Remove the reinforcements (1). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1683 26. Raise the vehicle in order to separate the frame from the vehicle. 27. Remove the frame brace bolts. 28. Remove the frame brace. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1684 29. Remove the stabilizer shaft. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement . 30. Remove the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 31. Remove the frame insulators from the frame. Refer to Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Front Insulator Replacement (See: Front Subframe Mount/Service and Repair) and Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Rear Insulator Replacement (See: Body / Frame Mount Bushing/Service and Repair). Installation Procedure 1. Install the frame insulators to the frame. Refer to Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Front Insulator Replacement (See: Front Subframe Mount/Service and Repair) and Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Rear Insulator Replacement (See: Body / Frame Mount Bushing/Service and Repair). 2. Install the lower control arms. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 3. Install the stabilizer shaft. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1685 4. Install the frame brace. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . 5. Install the frame brace bolts and tighten to 60 Nm (44 lb ft). 6. Position the transmission table with the frame under the vehicle. Note: Ensure that the power steering cooler line does not become trapped by the engine mount during this step. 7. Lower the vehicle while aligning the powertrain mounts with the frame until the vehicle is close to the frame. Note: Ensure that the alignment pins remain installed during the frame installation. 8. Inserting two 19 mm (0.75 in) diameter X 203 mm (8.0 in) long guide pins or drill bits into the frame rear alignment holes in order to align the frame. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1686 9. Install the front crossmember brace (1). Note: If the frame insulator bolt does not screw in smoothly, run a tap through the frame nut in the body in order to remove foreign material. Ensure the tap does not punch through the underbody. Do not over tighten the insulator. Over tightening may collapse a spacer or strip a bolt. Note: The frame to body bolts are Torque-to-Yield fasteners and MUST be replaced after one use. 10. Install the NEW front frame to body bolts (2) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 11. Install the front crossmember brace bolts (3) and tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 12. Install the reinforcements (1). 13. Install the NEW rear frame to body bolts (4) and tighten to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 14. Install the reinforcement bolts (2) and tighten to 60 Nm (44 lb ft). 15. Install the reinforcement studs (3) and tighten to 60 Nm (44 lb ft). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1687 16. Remove the alignment pins from the frame. 17. Install the underbody rear side rail. Refer to Underbody Rear Side Rail Replacement (). Note: The engine and transmission mount nuts must be replaced once removed. When the nut has to be loosened or removed, threadlocker must be used in addition to using a new nut. Allow adhesive on new engine and transmission mount nuts to cure for 24 hours after replacement. 18. Apply threadlocker GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) to the engine and transmission mount threads. 19. Install the engine and transmission mount nuts and tighten to 75 Nm (55 lb ft). 20. Install the power steering cooler inlet pipe to the frame. Refer to Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement . 21. Install the power steering gear to the frame. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement . 22. Install the power steering gear bolts. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement . 23. Install the power steering gear heat shield. Refer to Steering Gear Heat Shield Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1688 Note: Whenever the steering gear is moved in relation to the body, disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. 24. Disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 25. Connect the stabilizer shaft links to the stabilizer shaft. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement . 26. Install the lower ball joints to the steering knuckles. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 27. Install both lower ball joint retaining nuts. Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . 28. Install the propeller shaft if the vehicle is equipped with all wheel drive. Refer to Propeller Shaft Replacement . 29. Install the exhaust flexible pipe. Refer to Exhaust Flexible Pipe Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1689 30. Install the left engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement (See: Splash Guard/Service and Repair). 31. Install the front tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 32. Lower the vehicle. 33. Remove the engine support fixture. 34. Inspect the front wheel alignment and adjust the toe angle if necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment Measurement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair Front Subframe Mount: Service and Repair Drivetrain and Front Suspension Frame Front Insulator Replacement Special Tools J 45725 - Frame Bushing Installer Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . Note: Whenever the frame is moved in relation to the body, disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. 2. Disconnect the intermediate shaft from the steering gear stub shaft. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 3. Install a jackstand under the center of the frame, between the front frame insulators. Note: In order to remove any frame insulator, loosen the adjacent frame insulator to permit the frame to separate from the body. Use caution when lowering or tilting the frame to prevent damage to other components. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1693 4. Remove the front crossmember brace bolts (3). Note: When the frame insulator bolts are removed, always discard the bolts and replace with new bolts. 5. Remove the front frame to body bolts (2). 6. Remove the crossmember brace (1). 7. Lower the front of the frame only enough to service the insulator, approximately 38 mm (1.5 in). 8. Remove the upper insulator. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1694 9. Remove the lower insulator using a flat chisel. Begin extracting the insulator by guiding the wedge of the chisel tip between the insulator flange lip and the vehicle frame. 10. Continue extracting the insulator until it is fully removed from the frame. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the frame insulator opening. 2. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the inside of the frame insulator opening. 3. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the frame insulator. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1695 4. Install clamp J 45725 - Installer onto the insulator about 1/8 inch from the top of the insulator. 5. Align the split of the insulator to the front of the frame. 6. Install J 45725 - Installer to the insulator and the frame. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1696 7. Using J 45725 - Installer install the insulator until the insulator is halfway recessed in the frame. 8. Remove only the clamp J 45725 - Installer. 9. Using J 45725 - Installer continue installing the insulator until the flange lip of the insulator is fully seated to the bottom of the frame. 10. Remove J 45725 - Installer from the insulator and the frame. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1697 11. Install the upper insulator. 12. Raise the front of the frame. 13. Install the front crossmember brace (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . Note: If the frame insulator bolt does not screw in smoothly, run a tap through the frame nut in the body in order to remove foreign material. Ensure the tap does not punch through the underbody. Do not over tighten the insulator. Over tightening may collapse a spacer or strip a bolt. 14. Install the front frame to body bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 15. Install the front crossmember brace bolts (3). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1698 Tighten the bolt to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 16. Remove the jackstand. 17. Connect the intermediate shaft to the steering gear stub shaft. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 18. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 3. Remove the muffler. Exhaust Muffler Replacement . 4. Remove the rear brake caliper bracket bolts. 5. Secure the rear brake caliper and bracket assemblies to the vehicle underbody. 6. Remove the park brake cables from the park brake cable equalizer and park brake cable bracket. Refer to Parking Brake Cable Equalizer Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1703 7. Remove the lower bolts from the rear shock absorbers. Refer to Shock Absorber Replacement . 8. Remove the rear suspension crossmember wire harness retainers from the vehicle underbody. 9. Disconnect the rear suspension crossmember wire harness from the vehicle body wire harness. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1704 10. Support the rear suspension crossmember with a suitable stand. 11. Remove the four bolts securing the rear suspension crossmember to vehicle. 12. With the aid of an assistant, carefully lower the rear suspension crossmember or raise the vehicle away from the rear suspension crossmember. 13. Remove the jounce bumpers and springs from the rear suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1705 14. Release the wire harness retainers from the rear suspension crossmember. 15. Disconnect the wire harness from the wheel speed sensors. 16. Remove the wire harness from the rear suspension crossmember. 17. Release the wheel speed wire harness retainers from the rear suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1706 18. Remove the right park brake cable retaining bolts from the rear suspension crossmember. 19. Remove the right park brake cable from the rear suspension crossmember. 20. Remove the remaining suspension components from the rear suspension crossmember: * Stabilizer shaft insulator brackets-Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement . * Upper control arm-Refer to Upper Control Arm Replacement . * Adjustment link-Refer to Adjust Link Replacement . * Lower control arm-Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . Installation Procedure Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1707 1. Install the following suspension components to the rear suspension crossmember: * Lower control arm-Refer to Lower Control Arm Replacement . * Adjustment link-Refer to Adjust Link Replacement . * Upper control arm-Refer to Upper Control Arm Replacement . * Stabilizer shaft insulator brackets-Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Insulator Replacement . 2. Install the right park brake cable to the rear suspension crossmember. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . 3. Install the right park brake cable retaining bolts to the rear suspension crossmember. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1708 4. Install the wheel speed wire harness retainers to the rear suspension crossmember. 5. Install the wire harness to the rear suspension crossmember. 6. Attach the wire harness retainers to the rear suspension crossmember. 7. Connect the wire harness to the wheel speed sensors. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1709 8. Install the jounce bumpers and springs to the rear suspension crossmember. Refer to Rear Spring, Insulator, and Jounce Bumper Replacement for proper spring installation. 9. With the rear suspension crossmember mounted on a suitable stand and with the aid of an assistant, carefully lower the vehicle or raise the rear suspension crossmember into location on the vehicle. 10. Install the four bolts securing the rear suspension crossmember to vehicle. Tighten the bolts to 170 Nm (125 lb ft). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1710 11. Connect the rear suspension crossmember wire harness to the vehicle body wire harness. 12. Install the rear suspension crossmember wire harness retainers to the vehicle underbody. 13. Install the lower bolts to the rear shock absorbers. Refer to Shock Absorber Replacement . Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1711 14. Install the park brake cables to the park brake cable equalizer and park brake cable bracket. Refer to Parking Brake Cable Equalizer Replacement . 15. Install the rear brake caliper and bracket assemblies to the rear knuckles. 16. Install the rear brake caliper bracket bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb ft). 17. Install the muffler. Exhaust Muffler Replacement . 18. Install the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 19. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1712 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Support Lower Mount Replacement - Front Rear Suspension Support Lower Mount Replacement - Front Special Tools J 45725 - Frame Bushing Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 4. Remove the rear brake caliper bracket bolts. Note: Support the rear brake calipers from the vehicle body not the suspension to prevent stressing of the brake hoses. 5. Support the rear brake caliper. 6. Support the exhaust system on a suitable stand and disconnect the rubber insulator hangers from the exhaust system. 7. Lower the exhaust only enough to allow lowering of the suspension crossmember 38 mm (1.5 in). 8. Install jackstands under the front and rear of the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1713 Note: Both the front and rear of the suspension crossmember must be lowered equally to prevent over stressing the mounts. 9. Remove the suspension crossmember to body bolts. 10. Lower the suspension crossmember only enough to service the mount, approximately 38 mm (1.5 in). 11. Remove the upper mount. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1714 12. Remove the lower mount using a flat chisel. Begin extracting the mount by guiding the wedge of the chisel tip between the mount flange lip and the suspension crossmember. 13. Continue extracting the mount until it is fully removed from the suspension crossmember. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the frame mount opening. 2. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the inside of the suspension crossmember mount opening. 3. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the suspension crossmember mount. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1715 4. Install clamp J 45725 - Installer onto the mount about 1/8 inch from the top of the mount. 5. Align the split of the mount to the front of the suspension crossmember. 6. Install J 45725 Installer to the mount and the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1716 7. Using J 45725 - Installer install the mount until the mount is halfway recessed in the suspension crossmember. 8. Remove only the clamp J 45725 - Installer. 9. Using J 45725 - Installer continue installing the mount until the flange lip of the mount is fully seated to the bottom of the suspension crossmember. 10. Remove J 45725 - Installer from the mount and the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1717 11. Install the upper mount. 12. Raise the suspension crossmember. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . Note: If the suspension crossmember mount bolt does not screw in smoothly, run a tap through the frame crossmember nut in the body in order to remove foreign material. Ensure the tap does not punch through the underbody. Do not over tighten the body mount. Over tightening may collapse a spacer or strip a bolt. 13. Install the suspension crossmember to body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 14. Remove the jackstands. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1718 15. Install the rear brake caliper bracket and bolts. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement . 16. Install the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 17. Lower the vehicle. 18. Install the spare tire. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1719 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Support Lower Mount Replacement - Rear Rear Suspension Support Lower Mount Replacement - Rear Special Tools J 45725 - Frame Bushing Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 4. Remove the rear brake caliper bracket bolts. Note: Support the rear brake calipers from the vehicle body not the suspension to prevent stressing of the brake hoses. 5. Support the rear brake caliper. 6. Support the exhaust system on a suitable stand and disconnect the rubber insulator hangers from the exhaust system. 7. Lower the exhaust only enough to allow lowering of the suspension crossmember 38 mm (1.5 in). 8. Install jackstands under the front and rear of the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1720 Note: Both the front and rear of the suspension crossmember must be lowered equally to prevent over stressing the mounts. 9. Remove the suspension crossmember to body bolts. 10. Lower the suspension crossmember only enough to service the mount, approximately 38 mm (1.5 in). 11. Remove the upper mount. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1721 12. Remove the lower mount using a flat chisel. Begin extracting the mount by guiding the wedge of the chisel tip between the mount flange lip and the suspension crossmember. 13. Continue extracting the mount until it is fully removed from the suspension crossmember. Installation Procedure 1. Clean the frame mount opening. 2. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the inside of the suspension crossmember mount opening. 3. Apply a thin coat of rubber lubricant GM P/N 1051717 (Canadian P/N 5728223), or equivalent to the suspension crossmember mount. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1722 4. Install clamp J 45725 - Installer onto the mount about 1/8 inch from the top of the mount. 5. Align the split of the mount to the front of the suspension crossmember. 6. Install J 45725 Installer to the mount and the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1723 7. Using J 45725 - Installer install the mount until the mount is halfway recessed in the suspension crossmember. 8. Remove only the clamp J 45725 - Installer. 9. Using J 45725 - Installer continue installing the mount until the flange lip of the mount is fully seated to the bottom of the suspension crossmember. 10. Remove J 45725 - Installer from the mount and the suspension crossmember. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1724 11. Install the upper mount. 12. Raise the suspension crossmember. Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . Note: If the suspension crossmember mount bolt does not screw in smoothly, run a tap through the frame crossmember nut in the body in order to remove foreign material. Ensure the tap does not punch through the underbody. Do not over tighten the body mount. Over tightening may collapse a spacer or strip a bolt. 13. Install the suspension crossmember to body bolts. Tighten the bolts to 110 Nm (81 lb ft) plus 90 degrees. 14. Remove the jackstands. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Suspension Support Crossmember Replacement > Page 1725 15. Install the rear brake caliper bracket and bolts. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement . 16. Install the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 17. Lower the vehicle. 18. Install the spare tire. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Trailer Hitch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Disconnect the body wire harness (2) from the trailer wire harness connector (1). 3. If replacing the trailer hitch, remove the trailer wire harness connector (1) from the trailer hitch (2). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1729 4. If necessary, lower the exhaust system by serrating the rubber insulators from the exhaust underbody hangers (1. 2, and 3). 5. Remove the trailer hitch bolts (2-4). 6. Remove the trailer hitch (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1730 1. Install the trailer hitch (1). Caution: Refer to Fastener Caution . 2. Install the trailer hitch bolts (2-4). Tighten the bolts to 100 Nm (74 lb ft). 3. If necessary raise the exhaust system by installing the rubber insulators to the exhaust underbody hangers (1. 2, and 3). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1731 4. If previously removed, install the trailer wire harness connector (1) to the trailer hitch (2). 5. Connect the body wire harness (2) to the trailer wire harness connector (1). 6. lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-110-001 Date: March 30, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Use of Floor Mats Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X GM's carpeted and all-weather (rubber) floor mats are especially designed for use in specific GM vehicles. Using floor mats that were not designed for the specific vehicle or using them incorrectly may cause interference with the accelerator or brake pedal. Please review the following safety guidelines regarding proper driver's side floor mat usage with the customer. Warning If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the accelerator pedal and/or brake pedal. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal. - Do not flip the driver's floor mat over (in an effort to keep the floor mat clean) - Do not place anything on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. carpet remnant, towel) - Do not place another mat on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. do not place all-weather rubber mats over carpeted floor mats) - Only use floor mats that are designed specifically for your vehicle - When using replacement mats, make certain the mats do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal before driving the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a floor mat retaining pin(s) or clip(s), make certain the mat is installed correctly and according to the instructions. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 1737 After installing floor mats, make certain they cannot move and do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedals. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 08-08-52-001G > Aug > 10 > Keyless Entry - Intermittent/Inoperative Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter: Customer Interest Keyless Entry - Intermittent/Inoperative Remote TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-001G Date: August 24, 2010 Subject: EI08028 - Intermittent, Inoperative Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (Reprogram Key Fobs) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Sierra Denali, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the labor operation number. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-52-001F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that one or more key fobs are inoperative. A number of warranty claims have been submitted that show relearning the key fobs has corrected this concern. Cause Based on technician feedback, engineering has determined two possible causes for key fob concerns: - The fobs may not be programmed when the vehicles leave the plant. - There may be Issues with the fobs internal components. Correction To correct the customer's concern, reprogram the transmitter (key fob). Refer to the procedure for Transmitter Programming found in Service Information. If reprogramming the transmitter is not successful, it will be necessary to replace the transmitter. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 08-08-52-001G > Aug > 10 > Keyless Entry - Intermittent/Inoperative Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter: All Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Intermittent/Inoperative Remote TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-52-001G Date: August 24, 2010 Subject: EI08028 - Intermittent, Inoperative Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (Reprogram Key Fobs) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2007-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Sierra Denali, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the labor operation number. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-52-001F (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that one or more key fobs are inoperative. A number of warranty claims have been submitted that show relearning the key fobs has corrected this concern. Cause Based on technician feedback, engineering has determined two possible causes for key fob concerns: - The fobs may not be programmed when the vehicles leave the plant. - There may be Issues with the fobs internal components. Correction To correct the customer's concern, reprogram the transmitter (key fob). Refer to the procedure for Transmitter Programming found in Service Information. If reprogramming the transmitter is not successful, it will be necessary to replace the transmitter. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Mirror Motor: > 10-08-64-003A > Feb > 11 > Body - Mirror Glass Has Jerky Operation or Stops Power Mirror Motor: Customer Interest Body - Mirror Glass Has Jerky Operation or Stops TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-64-003A Date: February 15, 2011 Subject: Mirror Glass has Jerky Operation or Stops During Mirror Travel (Follow Procedure Outlined Below) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to remove the RPO from the model information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-64-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the left or right outside rearview mirror glass chatters or stops during adjustment. Correction 1. Remove the mirror glass. 2. Clean the dust and dirt from the dampener track(s) thoroughly. 3. Clean the dust and dirt from the spring finger(s) on the back of the glass. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Mirror Motor: > 10-08-64-003A > Feb > 11 > Body - Mirror Glass Has Jerky Operation or Stops > Page 1762 4. Apply a light coat of grease, GM P/N 12371287 (in Canada, use 10953437), to the dampener track(s). Note Do not use any other grease as it may deform the plastic. 5. Reinstall the mirror glass. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Mirror Motor: > 10-08-64-003A > Feb > 11 > Body - Mirror Glass Has Jerky Operation or Stops Power Mirror Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Mirror Glass Has Jerky Operation or Stops TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-64-003A Date: February 15, 2011 Subject: Mirror Glass has Jerky Operation or Stops During Mirror Travel (Follow Procedure Outlined Below) Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to remove the RPO from the model information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-64-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the left or right outside rearview mirror glass chatters or stops during adjustment. Correction 1. Remove the mirror glass. 2. Clean the dust and dirt from the dampener track(s) thoroughly. 3. Clean the dust and dirt from the spring finger(s) on the back of the glass. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Mirror Motor: > 10-08-64-003A > Feb > 11 > Body - Mirror Glass Has Jerky Operation or Stops > Page 1768 4. Apply a light coat of grease, GM P/N 12371287 (in Canada, use 10953437), to the dampener track(s). Note Do not use any other grease as it may deform the plastic. 5. Reinstall the mirror glass. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID Paint: Application and ID Paint Identification Warning Exposure to isocyanates during paint preparation and application processes can cause severe breathing problems. Read and follow all of the instructions from the manufacturers of painting materials, equipment, and protective gear. Note: Always refer to the GM Approved Refinish Materials book. This book identifies the paint systems you may use. The latest revision of the GM Approved Refinish Materials booklet is located on the Goodwrench website at www.gmgoodwrench.com. Use the service parts identification label to identify the type of paint technology, paint codes, trim level, and any special order paint colors on the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator Support: Service and Repair Front End Upper Tie Bar Support Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1785 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1786 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1787 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1788 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1794 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1795 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1796 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1797 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Luggage Rack: > 09-08-67-005C > Apr > 11 > Body Luggage Carrier Wind Noise Luggage Rack: Customer Interest Body - Luggage Carrier Wind Noise INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-67-005C Date: April 25, 2011 Subject: Information on Luggage Carrier Accessory Cross Rail Installation to Minimize Wind Noise Models: 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse with Luggage Carrier Accessory Cross Rails Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the vehicles equipped with sunroof information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-67-005B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Incorrect installation or improper placement of the luggage carrier accessory cross rails may cause the customer to return with a concern of excessive wind noise from the vehicle roof in the area of the cross rails. This excessive noise may be caused by backward installation (beaded edge facing rearward) and/or improper placement of the cross rails. The optimum placement of the accessory cross rails for wind noise reduction is as follows: Important Do not install the cross rails backwards (with the beaded edge facing rearwards). Note On all vehicles, the rear cross rail should be placed at the rear of the vehicle. This is the optimum placement of the cross rails for wind noise. When the cross rails are not in use, the front and rear cross rail should be stowed at a minimum of 355 mm (14 in) apart for wind noise reduction. Vehicles Equipped with Sunroofs (2009 Only) A redesigned luggage carrier cross rail package has been released. Replace the existing cross rails with the part number listed below. To minimize wind noise, follow the installation steps on the instruction sheet supplied with the new rail package. Verify that the cross rails are positioned with the beaded edge facing forward. Note The front cross rail should be placed halfway between the front and the rear sunroofs. Vehicles Equipped with Sunroof (2010-2011) Position the front cross rail halfway between the front and rear sunroofs. Position the rear cross rail at the rear of the vehicle (behind the rear sunroof). Do not replace the cross rails. These vehicles already have the redesigned cross rails. Vehicles without Sunroofs (2009-2011) Verify that the cross rails are positioned with the beaded edge facing forward. Do not replace the cross rails. Note The front cross rail should be placed at the rear of the front door. Parts Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Luggage Rack: > 09-08-67-005C > Apr > 11 > Body Luggage Carrier Wind Noise > Page 1807 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Luggage Rack: > 09-08-67-005C > Apr > 11 > Body - Luggage Carrier Wind Noise Luggage Rack: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Luggage Carrier Wind Noise INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-67-005C Date: April 25, 2011 Subject: Information on Luggage Carrier Accessory Cross Rail Installation to Minimize Wind Noise Models: 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse with Luggage Carrier Accessory Cross Rails Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the vehicles equipped with sunroof information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-67-005B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Incorrect installation or improper placement of the luggage carrier accessory cross rails may cause the customer to return with a concern of excessive wind noise from the vehicle roof in the area of the cross rails. This excessive noise may be caused by backward installation (beaded edge facing rearward) and/or improper placement of the cross rails. The optimum placement of the accessory cross rails for wind noise reduction is as follows: Important Do not install the cross rails backwards (with the beaded edge facing rearwards). Note On all vehicles, the rear cross rail should be placed at the rear of the vehicle. This is the optimum placement of the cross rails for wind noise. When the cross rails are not in use, the front and rear cross rail should be stowed at a minimum of 355 mm (14 in) apart for wind noise reduction. Vehicles Equipped with Sunroofs (2009 Only) A redesigned luggage carrier cross rail package has been released. Replace the existing cross rails with the part number listed below. To minimize wind noise, follow the installation steps on the instruction sheet supplied with the new rail package. Verify that the cross rails are positioned with the beaded edge facing forward. Note The front cross rail should be placed halfway between the front and the rear sunroofs. Vehicles Equipped with Sunroof (2010-2011) Position the front cross rail halfway between the front and rear sunroofs. Position the rear cross rail at the rear of the vehicle (behind the rear sunroof). Do not replace the cross rails. These vehicles already have the redesigned cross rails. Vehicles without Sunroofs (2009-2011) Verify that the cross rails are positioned with the beaded edge facing forward. Do not replace the cross rails. Note The front cross rail should be placed at the rear of the front door. Parts Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Luggage Rack: > 09-08-67-005C > Apr > 11 > Body - Luggage Carrier Wind Noise > Page 1813 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-08-50-006D Date: September 09, 2010 Subject: Minor Wrinkles/Creases, Discoloration, Cigarette Burns and Customer Induced Cuts and Stains on Front and Rear Driver and Passenger Seats with Leather, Vinyl or Cloth Seat Covers Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-50-006C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). If a customer comes in to your dealership due to certain conditions of the seat covers (splits, wrinkles, loose stitching, etc.), you must examine the seat cover in order to determine the validity of the customer claim. Some components from the above listed vehicles have been returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) and analysis of these parts showed "customer induced damage" or No Trouble Found (NTF). The dealer should pay particular attention to the following conditions: - Cigarette burns Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 1823 - Customer induced cuts (knife cuts, cut by customer tools, etc.) - Paint stains (customer should have cleaned paint stains while paint was still wet) - Coffee stains and other removable dirt These should be cleaned as described in the Owner's Manual under Appearance Care. Also, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029A or later. - Evidence of chemicals used for cleaning, other than those specified in the Owner's Manual - Other chemical spills - Minor and normal leather wrinkles as a result of use - Other defects to the seat cover not detected during the pre-delivery inspection (PDI). Inform the customer that the above issues were not present when the vehicle was purchased and cannot be replaced under warranty. The covers, however, may be repaired or replaced at the customer's expense. The following conditions are not caused by the customer and should be covered by warranty: - Split seams Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 1824 - Wear/cracking/peeling - Discoloration/dye transfer from customer clothing (if discoloration/dye transfer is not removed after using GM Leather and Vinyl Plastic Cleaner, P/N 88861401 (in Canada, P/N 88861409), replace the covers.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Latch: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust Seat Latch: Customer Interest Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-005C Date: March 02, 2011 Subject: Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy or Jerky Operation, Binds, Sticks, Seat Won't Adjust (Revise Seat Adjuster Mounting, Burnish Seat Tracks) Models: 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK with Seat RPO AH3 and/or AG5 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Correction steps. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-005B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the manual front driver and/or passenger seat is difficult to adjust in the forward and rearward direction. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that they are unable to move the seat. They may also comment that the seat adjuster bar is loose and not functioning. Condition 3 Some customers may comment that when moving the driver's seat fore or aft, the seat moves in a bumpy or jerky manner. The passenger seat may also be experiencing the same concern. Repair the passenger side component only if it is a customer concern. Cause 1 This condition may be caused by the seat tracks binding. This bind condition is a result of a bow in the seat track assembly. Cause 2 This may be caused by the seat adjuster bar becoming disengaged from the seat track assembly. Cause 3 The seat track bearings ride on the bearing races, which may have not properly mated. The bearing races may take a set when the seat is stationary. Correction 1 Use the following procedure to install flat washers (one per mounting bolt, two per seat) between the seat adjuster rear attachments and the mounting area on the floor of the vehicle. This will remove the bow in the seat tracks by raising the rear of the seat adjuster assembly. If this does not correct the condition, it will be necessary to revise the front seat track mounting hooks. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Latch: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1833 1. Remove the outboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the tab in the rear of the cover (1). 2. Remove the inboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Pull upward to release the retainer clip securing the cover to the seat adjuster (2). 3. Remove the two front seat mounting bolts (3). 4. Install two M12 flat washers (one per mounting bolt, two per seat), such as *Kent Industries Part #P96851M01 or the equivalent, between the seat adjuster assembly and the vehicle floor where the seat bolt fastens to the floor. Ensure that the washer is centered over the hole in the sheet metal (Washer Dimension, O.D.24 mm, I.D.13 mm Thickness 2.5 mm). 5. Reinstall the two front seat mounting bolts (3). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb ft). 6. Lubricate the seat tracks with an aerosol lubricant such as GM Super Lube, P/N 12346241 (in Canada, 10953474), or the equivalent. 7. Reinstall the front seat adjuster bolt finish covers. Cycle the seat to verify that the seat doesn't bind or stick. If the seat is still binding, proceed to the following additional steps. Note The following steps (1-7) only apply to vehicles built before January 25, 2011. Vehicles built after this date use revised seat tracks. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Latch: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1834 1. Remove the outboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the tab in the rear of the cover (1). 2. Remove the inboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Pull upward to release the retainer clip securing the cover to the seat adjuster (2). 3. Disconnect the seat wiring harness from the vehicle harness. Remove the seat and place on a suitable clean work area. 4. Locate the hooks on the front of the inner and outer seat tracks. Identify the raised area as shown. 5. Using a small flat file, remove the raised area as shown at all four locations (two per side). 6. Coat the bare metal with black touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. 7. Reinstall the seat assembly. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb ft). Correction 2 Use the following steps to reattach the release handle to the seat track assembly. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Latch: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1835 1. Inspect the underside of the seat and ensure that the adjuster bar is engaged into the seat track levers on both sides. The seat adjuster assembly has been removed for photographic purposes only. It is not necessary to remove the seat or the adjuster assembly to perform this repair. 2. If the adjuster bar is out of position, apply inward pressure to the adjuster bar ends and reinsert the two seat track levers into the plastic end caps on the ends of the seat adjuster bar. Correction 3 Use the following steps to burnish the seat track bearings. This will level the bearing races. - Place a 90 kg (200 lb) weight on the affected seat. - Cycle the seat forward and rearward 30 times to smooth out the bearing race surface. - Occupy the seat, cycle the seat and verify the customer's concern is corrected. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information The M-12 Flat Washers can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Latch: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1836 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Latch: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust Seat Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-005C Date: March 02, 2011 Subject: Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy or Jerky Operation, Binds, Sticks, Seat Won't Adjust (Revise Seat Adjuster Mounting, Burnish Seat Tracks) Models: 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK with Seat RPO AH3 and/or AG5 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Correction steps. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-005B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the manual front driver and/or passenger seat is difficult to adjust in the forward and rearward direction. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that they are unable to move the seat. They may also comment that the seat adjuster bar is loose and not functioning. Condition 3 Some customers may comment that when moving the driver's seat fore or aft, the seat moves in a bumpy or jerky manner. The passenger seat may also be experiencing the same concern. Repair the passenger side component only if it is a customer concern. Cause 1 This condition may be caused by the seat tracks binding. This bind condition is a result of a bow in the seat track assembly. Cause 2 This may be caused by the seat adjuster bar becoming disengaged from the seat track assembly. Cause 3 The seat track bearings ride on the bearing races, which may have not properly mated. The bearing races may take a set when the seat is stationary. Correction 1 Use the following procedure to install flat washers (one per mounting bolt, two per seat) between the seat adjuster rear attachments and the mounting area on the floor of the vehicle. This will remove the bow in the seat tracks by raising the rear of the seat adjuster assembly. If this does not correct the condition, it will be necessary to revise the front seat track mounting hooks. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Latch: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1842 1. Remove the outboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the tab in the rear of the cover (1). 2. Remove the inboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Pull upward to release the retainer clip securing the cover to the seat adjuster (2). 3. Remove the two front seat mounting bolts (3). 4. Install two M12 flat washers (one per mounting bolt, two per seat), such as *Kent Industries Part #P96851M01 or the equivalent, between the seat adjuster assembly and the vehicle floor where the seat bolt fastens to the floor. Ensure that the washer is centered over the hole in the sheet metal (Washer Dimension, O.D.24 mm, I.D.13 mm Thickness 2.5 mm). 5. Reinstall the two front seat mounting bolts (3). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb ft). 6. Lubricate the seat tracks with an aerosol lubricant such as GM Super Lube, P/N 12346241 (in Canada, 10953474), or the equivalent. 7. Reinstall the front seat adjuster bolt finish covers. Cycle the seat to verify that the seat doesn't bind or stick. If the seat is still binding, proceed to the following additional steps. Note The following steps (1-7) only apply to vehicles built before January 25, 2011. Vehicles built after this date use revised seat tracks. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Latch: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1843 1. Remove the outboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the tab in the rear of the cover (1). 2. Remove the inboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Pull upward to release the retainer clip securing the cover to the seat adjuster (2). 3. Disconnect the seat wiring harness from the vehicle harness. Remove the seat and place on a suitable clean work area. 4. Locate the hooks on the front of the inner and outer seat tracks. Identify the raised area as shown. 5. Using a small flat file, remove the raised area as shown at all four locations (two per side). 6. Coat the bare metal with black touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. 7. Reinstall the seat assembly. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb ft). Correction 2 Use the following steps to reattach the release handle to the seat track assembly. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Latch: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1844 1. Inspect the underside of the seat and ensure that the adjuster bar is engaged into the seat track levers on both sides. The seat adjuster assembly has been removed for photographic purposes only. It is not necessary to remove the seat or the adjuster assembly to perform this repair. 2. If the adjuster bar is out of position, apply inward pressure to the adjuster bar ends and reinsert the two seat track levers into the plastic end caps on the ends of the seat adjuster bar. Correction 3 Use the following steps to burnish the seat track bearings. This will level the bearing races. - Place a 90 kg (200 lb) weight on the affected seat. - Cycle the seat forward and rearward 30 times to smooth out the bearing race surface. - Occupy the seat, cycle the seat and verify the customer's concern is corrected. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information The M-12 Flat Washers can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Latch: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1845 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Track: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust Seat Track: Customer Interest Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-005C Date: March 02, 2011 Subject: Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy or Jerky Operation, Binds, Sticks, Seat Won't Adjust (Revise Seat Adjuster Mounting, Burnish Seat Tracks) Models: 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK with Seat RPO AH3 and/or AG5 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Correction steps. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-005B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the manual front driver and/or passenger seat is difficult to adjust in the forward and rearward direction. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that they are unable to move the seat. They may also comment that the seat adjuster bar is loose and not functioning. Condition 3 Some customers may comment that when moving the driver's seat fore or aft, the seat moves in a bumpy or jerky manner. The passenger seat may also be experiencing the same concern. Repair the passenger side component only if it is a customer concern. Cause 1 This condition may be caused by the seat tracks binding. This bind condition is a result of a bow in the seat track assembly. Cause 2 This may be caused by the seat adjuster bar becoming disengaged from the seat track assembly. Cause 3 The seat track bearings ride on the bearing races, which may have not properly mated. The bearing races may take a set when the seat is stationary. Correction 1 Use the following procedure to install flat washers (one per mounting bolt, two per seat) between the seat adjuster rear attachments and the mounting area on the floor of the vehicle. This will remove the bow in the seat tracks by raising the rear of the seat adjuster assembly. If this does not correct the condition, it will be necessary to revise the front seat track mounting hooks. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Track: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1854 1. Remove the outboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the tab in the rear of the cover (1). 2. Remove the inboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Pull upward to release the retainer clip securing the cover to the seat adjuster (2). 3. Remove the two front seat mounting bolts (3). 4. Install two M12 flat washers (one per mounting bolt, two per seat), such as *Kent Industries Part #P96851M01 or the equivalent, between the seat adjuster assembly and the vehicle floor where the seat bolt fastens to the floor. Ensure that the washer is centered over the hole in the sheet metal (Washer Dimension, O.D.24 mm, I.D.13 mm Thickness 2.5 mm). 5. Reinstall the two front seat mounting bolts (3). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb ft). 6. Lubricate the seat tracks with an aerosol lubricant such as GM Super Lube, P/N 12346241 (in Canada, 10953474), or the equivalent. 7. Reinstall the front seat adjuster bolt finish covers. Cycle the seat to verify that the seat doesn't bind or stick. If the seat is still binding, proceed to the following additional steps. Note The following steps (1-7) only apply to vehicles built before January 25, 2011. Vehicles built after this date use revised seat tracks. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Track: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1855 1. Remove the outboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the tab in the rear of the cover (1). 2. Remove the inboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Pull upward to release the retainer clip securing the cover to the seat adjuster (2). 3. Disconnect the seat wiring harness from the vehicle harness. Remove the seat and place on a suitable clean work area. 4. Locate the hooks on the front of the inner and outer seat tracks. Identify the raised area as shown. 5. Using a small flat file, remove the raised area as shown at all four locations (two per side). 6. Coat the bare metal with black touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. 7. Reinstall the seat assembly. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb ft). Correction 2 Use the following steps to reattach the release handle to the seat track assembly. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Track: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1856 1. Inspect the underside of the seat and ensure that the adjuster bar is engaged into the seat track levers on both sides. The seat adjuster assembly has been removed for photographic purposes only. It is not necessary to remove the seat or the adjuster assembly to perform this repair. 2. If the adjuster bar is out of position, apply inward pressure to the adjuster bar ends and reinsert the two seat track levers into the plastic end caps on the ends of the seat adjuster bar. Correction 3 Use the following steps to burnish the seat track bearings. This will level the bearing races. - Place a 90 kg (200 lb) weight on the affected seat. - Cycle the seat forward and rearward 30 times to smooth out the bearing race surface. - Occupy the seat, cycle the seat and verify the customer's concern is corrected. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information The M-12 Flat Washers can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Track: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1857 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust Seat Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-005C Date: March 02, 2011 Subject: Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy or Jerky Operation, Binds, Sticks, Seat Won't Adjust (Revise Seat Adjuster Mounting, Burnish Seat Tracks) Models: 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK with Seat RPO AH3 and/or AG5 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Correction steps. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-005B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition 1 Some customers may comment that the manual front driver and/or passenger seat is difficult to adjust in the forward and rearward direction. Condition 2 Some customers may comment that they are unable to move the seat. They may also comment that the seat adjuster bar is loose and not functioning. Condition 3 Some customers may comment that when moving the driver's seat fore or aft, the seat moves in a bumpy or jerky manner. The passenger seat may also be experiencing the same concern. Repair the passenger side component only if it is a customer concern. Cause 1 This condition may be caused by the seat tracks binding. This bind condition is a result of a bow in the seat track assembly. Cause 2 This may be caused by the seat adjuster bar becoming disengaged from the seat track assembly. Cause 3 The seat track bearings ride on the bearing races, which may have not properly mated. The bearing races may take a set when the seat is stationary. Correction 1 Use the following procedure to install flat washers (one per mounting bolt, two per seat) between the seat adjuster rear attachments and the mounting area on the floor of the vehicle. This will remove the bow in the seat tracks by raising the rear of the seat adjuster assembly. If this does not correct the condition, it will be necessary to revise the front seat track mounting hooks. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1863 1. Remove the outboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the tab in the rear of the cover (1). 2. Remove the inboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Pull upward to release the retainer clip securing the cover to the seat adjuster (2). 3. Remove the two front seat mounting bolts (3). 4. Install two M12 flat washers (one per mounting bolt, two per seat), such as *Kent Industries Part #P96851M01 or the equivalent, between the seat adjuster assembly and the vehicle floor where the seat bolt fastens to the floor. Ensure that the washer is centered over the hole in the sheet metal (Washer Dimension, O.D.24 mm, I.D.13 mm Thickness 2.5 mm). 5. Reinstall the two front seat mounting bolts (3). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb ft). 6. Lubricate the seat tracks with an aerosol lubricant such as GM Super Lube, P/N 12346241 (in Canada, 10953474), or the equivalent. 7. Reinstall the front seat adjuster bolt finish covers. Cycle the seat to verify that the seat doesn't bind or stick. If the seat is still binding, proceed to the following additional steps. Note The following steps (1-7) only apply to vehicles built before January 25, 2011. Vehicles built after this date use revised seat tracks. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1864 1. Remove the outboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the tab in the rear of the cover (1). 2. Remove the inboard front seat adjuster bolt finish cover. Pull upward to release the retainer clip securing the cover to the seat adjuster (2). 3. Disconnect the seat wiring harness from the vehicle harness. Remove the seat and place on a suitable clean work area. 4. Locate the hooks on the front of the inner and outer seat tracks. Identify the raised area as shown. 5. Using a small flat file, remove the raised area as shown at all four locations (two per side). 6. Coat the bare metal with black touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. 7. Reinstall the seat assembly. Tighten Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb ft). Correction 2 Use the following steps to reattach the release handle to the seat track assembly. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1865 1. Inspect the underside of the seat and ensure that the adjuster bar is engaged into the seat track levers on both sides. The seat adjuster assembly has been removed for photographic purposes only. It is not necessary to remove the seat or the adjuster assembly to perform this repair. 2. If the adjuster bar is out of position, apply inward pressure to the adjuster bar ends and reinsert the two seat track levers into the plastic end caps on the ends of the seat adjuster bar. Correction 3 Use the following steps to burnish the seat track bearings. This will level the bearing races. - Place a 90 kg (200 lb) weight on the affected seat. - Cycle the seat forward and rearward 30 times to smooth out the bearing race surface. - Occupy the seat, cycle the seat and verify the customer's concern is corrected. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information The M-12 Flat Washers can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 10-08-50-005C > Mar > 11 > Seats - Manual Seat Adjuster Bumpy Or Jerky/Won't Adjust > Page 1866 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1876 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1877 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1878 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1879 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-66-005B Date: July 21, 2010 Subject: Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair Information Models: 2008-2011 Buick Enclave 2009-2011 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2011 GMC Acadia 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-66-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition #1 Power liftgate only opens as a manual gate. Cause 1. I/P switch turned off 2. Low battery voltage 3. Low outside air temperature (-30ºC (-22ºF)) 4. Very high outside temperature increases temperature inside vehicle above (80ºC (176ºF)) Correction 1. Turn the IP switch on. 2. Charge the battery. 3. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very cold temperatures, such as those below -29°C (-20°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. 4. The power liftgate will become inoperative at very high temperatures, such as those above 80°C (176°F), and will need to be operated manually. The mechanism should return to normal operation after the temperature range reaches permissible level. Condition #2 Power liftgate opens unintentionally in park. Liftgate opens and closes by itself after the vehicle is shifted into Park. Cause 1. Outside liftgate release switch malfunction. 2. Liftgate close switch malfunction. 3. Sill plate activating liftgate close switch. 4. Vehicle is in Park. Power liftgate opens and closes by itself repeatedly until the customer uses the console button to turn off the power liftgate, or Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1885 battery runs low. Correction 1. Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. 2. Inspect the shut face function. Also check for DTC B2494 failure code 02. The touch pad and the shut face run in parallel, so check each switch separately. Replace the close switch if water is present in the switch and make sure the grommet on the wiper arm shaft to the outer panel is seated properly. If the grommet is loose, apply a small amount of weatherstrip adhesive in the grommet's U channel and reinstall the grommet (Buick Only). 3. Inspect the sill plate for proper installation/clearance to the touch pad switch and possible bent retainers. Condition #3 Power liftgate reverses while closing at the start (top) of travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods) 2. Key fob sending a second hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button, others if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). Refer to the Cause and Correction for Condition #8. 3. Low battery voltage. Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Charge the battery. Condition #4 Power liftgate reverses while closing mid travel. Cause 1. Strut stanchion (strut dries out while sitting open for long periods). 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Someone getting into the vehicle while the gate is closing (If you jump into the vehicle while the liftgate is closing, you can cause a reversal in mid travel). Correction 1. Close the gate manually after the gate has remained open for extended periods. One time should be sufficient. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Do not jounce the vehicle while the PLG is in motion. Sit lightly into vehicle while PLG is in operation. Condition #5 Power liftgate reverses while closing when almost closed. Cause 1. An obstruction behind the 3rd row seat. 2. The sill plate is not seated correctly (Not seated fully / bent attachments). Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1886 3. The side reveal molding pins are not fully seated, causing the trim to not fully seat (Buick). 4. The rubber bumpers on the liftgate in the lower corners may not be fully seated (GMC / Saturn). 5. The striker may be out of alignment. 6. The striker was moved forward or backward. 7. The liftgate may not be flush to the fascia. 8. The primary seal may not be fully seated. Correction 1. Remove the obstruction. 2. Inspect the sill plate for installation and possible bent retainers. 3. Push in the side reveal molding retainers. 4. Turn the bumpers in fully. 5. Align the striker. Perform the Liftgate Calibration Procedure. 6. Perform the liftgate calibration procedure. 7. Move the striker rearward to flush out gate and relearn. Marking the current location of the liftgate striker, loosen the striker bolts and strike the striker rearward with a mallet to adjust the liftgate striker outboard (to the rear of the vehicle). Only move the striker in 1‹›mm increments, performing the Liftgate Calibration Procedure after each adjustment. 8. Glue the primary seal down. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1887 Condition #6 Power liftgate closes immediately after fully opening. Usually has a loud clunking noise at top of gate travel just before power closing. A customer and/or technician may comment that when using the power liftgate, it will open fully, drop a few inches, then power close. Cause Weak strut(s) (PLG goes into a customer safe mode and power closes gate slowly). Correction Turn off the power liftgate using the disable switch in the bottom of the center stack. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position using the exterior liftgate pull handle. Verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position for several minutes. If the liftgate will not remain open, replace the liftgate strut(s) that are weak. Though both struts should be inspected for weakness, it is often only the LH strut that requires replacement. It is important to note that the LH and RH assist struts have two different part numbers and each should be installed in its proper location. Condition #7 Power liftgate reverses while opening. Cause 1. Obstacle observed or someone sending a second signal via the key fob, outside touch pad, I/P button or PLG Close button. 2. Key fob sending a double hit signal (Some key fobs will send a second hit signal upon release of the button when held longer than 1 second, others will send a second signal if you roll your thumb while holding down the button or a combination of the two together). 3. Touch pad sending a second signal. Correction 1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Inspect the key fob operation. 3. Inspect the touch pad function. Condition #8 Some customers may comment that the power liftgate intermittently reverses direction after activation. For example - They may state that when commanded, the rear liftgate opens and after motion occurs in one direction, the liftgate may reverse direction and close. Cause The cause of this condition may be specific to the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter's button configuration and the press and hold feature. The customer has to press and hold the power liftgate button (approximately 1 second) until the liftgate activation occurs. This extended button press may cause the remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) to interpret this as 2 button presses when only 1 is needed. Correction A new RKE transmitter has been released to correct this condition. Verify that the vehicle build date is before April 1, 2008 before replacing the key fob. Replace and reprogram both RKE transmitters. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-52-002. Condition #9 1. The power liftgate outside handle does not work all the time. 2. The power liftgate outside handle requires extra force (have to squeeze hard) to operate. Cause Outside liftgate touch pad malfunction. Correction Inspect the liftgate touch pad function. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: > 08-08-66-005B > Jul > 10 > Body - Power Liftgate Diagnosis and Repair > Page 1888 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair Splash Guard: Service and Repair Engine Splash Shield Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Air Dam > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Compartment Sight Shields Replacement Air Dam: Service and Repair Front Compartment Sight Shields Replacement Front Compartment Sight Shields Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Air Dam > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Compartment Sight Shields Replacement > Page 1897 Air Dam: Service and Repair Front Air Deflector Replacement Front Air Deflector Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 1903 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Opening Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Opening Weatherstrip Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front door sill plate. Refer to Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement . 2. Remove the weatherstrip (1) from the pinch-weld flange (2). Installation Procedure 1. Align the weatherstrip to the door opening with the bond joint positioned at the lower center of the door opening. 2. Install the weatherstrip to the pinch-weld flange. Ensure the weatherstrip is fully seated. 3. Install the front door sill plate. Refer to Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 1904 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Front Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Rear Outer Seal Replacement Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Rear Outer Seal Replacement Hood Rear Outer Seal Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Rear Outer Seal Replacement > Page 1909 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Front Weatherstrip Replacement Hood Front Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Hood Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Rear Outer Seal Replacement > Page 1910 Hood Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement Hood Rear Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Starting at the bottom of the sealing strip, pull the sealing strip away from the door pinch-weld flange. 2. Lift upward in order to remove the upper portion of the sealing strip from the door pinch-weld flange. 3. Remove the sealing strip from the door. Installation Procedure 1. Starting at the top of the sealing strip, insert the sealing strip tab into the door sheet metal. 2. Position the sealing strip to the door pinch-weld flange and apply pressure in order to seat the sealing strip. 3. Ensure that the sealing strip is fully seated against the pinch-weld flange. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement > Page 1915 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Front or Rear Side Door Lower Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement > Page 1916 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Opening Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Door Opening Weatherstrip Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the rear door sill plate. Refer to Rear Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement . 2. Remove the weatherstrip (1) from the pinch-weld flange. Installation Procedure 1. Align the weatherstrip (1) to the door opening with the bond joint positioned at the lower center of the door opening. 2. Install the weatherstrip to the pinch-weld flange. Ensure the weatherstrip is fully seated. 3. Install the rear door sill plate. Refer to Rear Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement . Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Sealing Strip Replacement > Page 1917 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Side Door Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Liftgate Weatherstrip Replacement Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide Instrument Cluster / Carrier: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-08-49-020D Date: December 06, 2010 Subject: IPC Odometer Programming Method Quick Reference Guide Models: 2003-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold in the U.S. and Canada Only. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information for the 2011 model year and add new 2011 vehicles. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-49-020C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide to help identify which season odometer programming method to use after replacing the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The three season odometer programming methods in use today are listed below. In addition, this reference guide lists the component where the season odometer value is stored. The season odometer value may be stored in the IPC, the driver information center (DIC) or the integrated body control module (IBCM), also commonly called a body control module (BCM). Season Odometer Programming Methods in Use Today 1. IPC reprogramming and setup using the service programming system (SPS). 2. Odometer setup at the electronic service center (ESC) when using an exchange IPC/DIC. 3. Tech 2(R) - The Tech 2 is used to set up a replacement BCM, which includes loading the odometer value that is displayed and stored in the IPC. A replacement IPC will display the previously stored vehicle odometer value, communicated from the BCM, after cycling the ignition or driving the vehicle. *The odometer programming is integrated as part of the BCM programming procedure. It is not a stand-alone event. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 1926 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 1927 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 1928 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1929 Instrument Cluster / Carrier: Locations English Up Level Shown, Metric Similar Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1934 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1935 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1936 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1937 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1938 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide Odometer: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-08-49-020D Date: December 06, 2010 Subject: IPC Odometer Programming Method Quick Reference Guide Models: 2003-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin applies to vehicles sold in the U.S. and Canada Only. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add information for the 2011 model year and add new 2011 vehicles. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-49-020C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a reference guide to help identify which season odometer programming method to use after replacing the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The three season odometer programming methods in use today are listed below. In addition, this reference guide lists the component where the season odometer value is stored. The season odometer value may be stored in the IPC, the driver information center (DIC) or the integrated body control module (IBCM), also commonly called a body control module (BCM). Season Odometer Programming Methods in Use Today 1. IPC reprogramming and setup using the service programming system (SPS). 2. Odometer setup at the electronic service center (ESC) when using an exchange IPC/DIC. 3. Tech 2(R) - The Tech 2 is used to set up a replacement BCM, which includes loading the odometer value that is displayed and stored in the IPC. A replacement IPC will display the previously stored vehicle odometer value, communicated from the BCM, after cycling the ignition or driving the vehicle. *The odometer programming is integrated as part of the BCM programming procedure. It is not a stand-alone event. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 1943 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 1944 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - IPC Odometer Programming Reference Guide > Page 1945 Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary. A "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message comes on. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and, at this time, the system must be reset. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. To reset the system: If the vehicle does not have Driver Information Center buttons: 1. Turn the ignition to "ON/RUN", with the engine off. The vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display. Press the trip odometer reset stem until "OIL LIFE REMAINING" displays. 2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until "OIL LIFE REMAINING" shows "100%." Three chimes sound and the "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message goes off. 3. Turn the key to "LOCK/OFF". If the "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message comes back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure. If the vehicle has Driver Information Center buttons: 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off. 2. Press the vehicle information button until "OIL LIFE REMAINING" displays. 3. Press and hold the "set/reset" button until "100%" is displayed. Three chimes sound and the "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message goes off. 4. Turn the key to "LOCK/OFF". If the "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message comes back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1954 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1955 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1956 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1957 Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 1958 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Backup Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 1972 Numerous & Various Size Drops of Water Collecting on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens After the Vehicle Has Been Exposed to Rain or a Car Washing Environment - A condition that covers more than half the surface of the lamp lens. - An accumulation of water in the bottom of the lamp assembly. - A condition that WON'T clear when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a different performance. Any of the above conditions would indicate the need to service the lens or lamp assembly. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Brake Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 1977 Numerous & Various Size Drops of Water Collecting on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens After the Vehicle Has Been Exposed to Rain or a Car Washing Environment - A condition that covers more than half the surface of the lamp lens. - An accumulation of water in the bottom of the lamp assembly. - A condition that WON'T clear when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a different performance. Any of the above conditions would indicate the need to service the lens or lamp assembly. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Lens > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention Headlamp Lens: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-42-001D Date: June 21, 2010 Subject: Headlamp Lens Overheating When Covered and Chemical Damage to Exterior Polycarbonate Headlamp Lenses Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and to revise the warning statements. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-42-001C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The bulletin is being issued to make dealers and customers aware of chemical damage that may be caused to exterior polycarbonate headlamp lenses. Most late model vehicles have these types of headlamp lenses. This material is used because of its temperature and high impact resistance. A variety of chemicals can cause crazing or cracking of the headlamp lens. Headlamp lenses are very sensitive. Care should be exercised to avoid contact with all exterior headlamp lenses when treating a vehicle with any type of chemical, such as those recommended for rail dust removal. Rubbing compound, grease tar and oil removers, tire cleaners, cleaner waxes and even car wash soaps in too high a concentration may also attribute to this condition. This could result in the need to replace the entire headlamp housing. Warning Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Also, crazing or deformations of the lens may occur if a shop mat or fender cover is draped over the fender and covers a portion or all of the headlamp assembly while the DRL or headlamps are on. This action restricts the amount of heat dissipated by the headlamps. Warning Care should be taken to not cover headlamps with shop mats or fender covers if the vehicle is being serviced with the headlamps or DRL illuminated. Covering an illuminated lamp can cause excessive heat build up and crazing/deformation of the lens may occur. The degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually become hairline cracks in the lens. In extreme cases, it could cause the lens to deform. This damage can also be caused by aftermarket shields that are often tinted in color. Once a heat buildup is generated by the headlamp, a degradation of the headlamp lens begins. This degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually manifest as spider cracks. In more extreme cases, it will begin to melt the lens of the headlamp. Notice Headlamps damaged by chemicals, improper cleaning, or overheating due to being covered are not covered under the new vehicle warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Parking Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 1987 Numerous & Various Size Drops of Water Collecting on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens After the Vehicle Has Been Exposed to Rain or a Car Washing Environment - A condition that covers more than half the surface of the lamp lens. - An accumulation of water in the bottom of the lamp assembly. - A condition that WON'T clear when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a different performance. Any of the above conditions would indicate the need to service the lens or lamp assembly. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Tail Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 1992 Numerous & Various Size Drops of Water Collecting on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens After the Vehicle Has Been Exposed to Rain or a Car Washing Environment - A condition that covers more than half the surface of the lamp lens. - An accumulation of water in the bottom of the lamp assembly. - A condition that WON'T clear when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a different performance. Any of the above conditions would indicate the need to service the lens or lamp assembly. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Turn Signal Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 1998 Numerous & Various Size Drops of Water Collecting on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens After the Vehicle Has Been Exposed to Rain or a Car Washing Environment - A condition that covers more than half the surface of the lamp lens. - An accumulation of water in the bottom of the lamp assembly. - A condition that WON'T clear when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a different performance. Any of the above conditions would indicate the need to service the lens or lamp assembly. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Heated Glass Element: Customer Interest A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2008 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2009 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2010 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Heated Glass Element: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2016 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2017 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Glass Element: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2018 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: Customer Interest A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2029 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2030 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2031 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-48-006H Date: April 11, 2011 Subject: Repair Information for Reconnection of Rear Window Defroster Contact or Tab Models: 2000-2012 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2010 Opel GT 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X Equipped With Electric Rear Window Defroster - RPO C49 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-48-006G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Repair Suggestions Soldering Defroster Contact Tabs In many cases the terminal tab will still be in the connector when you examine the vehicle. For Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban, GMC Yukon, and Cadillac Escalade vehicles (with moveable glass), always replace the defroster tab (GM P/N 25916031) and the defroster electrical power connector (P/N 12034110). For all other vehicles, reconnect the original defroster tab. In most applications it is preferable to create a new solder connection to reattach a separated rear defroster tab. If you take note of the steps below, it is possible to create a new solder joint that is equal to, or stronger than, the original. The generic procedure below is not very time intensive, but does include minor preparation work to create a good bonding surface. Be sure to follow each of the steps, as combined they will produce the strongest bond possible. Please consider the following before attempting the repair: - Soldering introduces significant heat to the glass window of the vehicle. When performing the re-connection of the tab, use only the heat required to do the job. Pre-heat the soldering iron and have the solder in your other hand, ready to go, the moment you have enough heat to melt the solder. - If it is winter, bring the vehicle into the service garage and remove any snow from the back window area. Allow time for the glass to warm to the temperature inside the building. Soldering creates a "hot spot" in the glass. DO NOT solder on cold glass. Caution Heating the glass excessively, or repeatedly without time to cool, may result in glass breakage. ALWAYS wear safety glasses when performing this repair! - You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the connection. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Silver bearing solder will adhere to the electrical buss bar, making a strong and lasting repair. - Protect surfaces under the area to be soldered. It is very easy to drip solder when performing this repair. Placing a shop towel under the soldering area is sufficient protection. Soldering Procedure 1. It is imperative to remove and replace the rear defroster electrical power connector by crimping a new connector to the feed wire. The proper connector P/N 12034110 can be found in the Packard Electrical Assortment, Tray 18, Position 5. - Insert Delphi pick 12094430 to depress the locking tab on the terminal. - Insert Delphi pick 12094429 to release the secondary lock tab. Important DO NOT re-use the existing defroster tab on new-style full-size utility vehicles with moveable glass. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the defroster tab. Fully engage the connector. An improperly seated connector may cause excessive resistance and impede the proper operation of the defroster. Add a small bead of solder to mate the electrical connector tab to the defroster tab. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2037 3. Prepare the surface of the used defroster tab (not required for new tabs on new-style full-size utility models) and the defroster buss bar with fine grain (500 grit) sandpaper or Emery cloth. It is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no oxidation is present. The photo above shows a close up of a properly prepared surface. Tip You may want to mask the glass around the contact area with tape. This is easy to do and will allow you to safely prepare the contact surface without the risk of scratching the glass or the black painted shading. Important Most rear glass has a black painted masking around the edge of the glass. When cleaning up the connection surface, be very careful not to damage the surface of the black shading or the surface of the glass. 4. Wipe the newly prepared contact area with Kent Automotive* Acrysol(TM) (or equivalent) to remove any residual oil or dirt. Important Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2038 You MUST use a silver-bearing solder to make the solder joint. DO NOT attempt this repair with conventional tin/lead alloy solders. Most suppliers have this type of solder available and it is available nationally at Radio Shack(R)*. It is sold in several diameters and either are acceptable for this repair. 5. For this step, it is permitted that two technicians be used if required. Heat the new connector on the surface of the buss bar that is to be soldered. Long nose pliers are suggested to hold the electrical connector and the defroster tab in place. Keep the solder ready and begin flowing out the solder as soon as the melting temperature has been reached. Tip If a single technician is attempting this repair, it is beneficial to wrap one turn of the solder around the new contacts base. In this manner, as the melting point of the solder is reached, a layer is deposited on the bottom side of the contact. Important Try to align the new contact so that it is positioned with the same orientation as the original contact. 6. The above illustrates an ideal finished solder joint. Additional stray solder will not harm the performance of the bond; however, while it is unlikely that customers may refer to the appearance of the rear window defroster and its components as a positive styling feature of the vehicle interior, it is easy to elicit the opposite reaction due to a poor cosmetic application. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Acrysol(TM) can be ordered directly from Kent Automotive at 1-800-654-6333 (in Canada, 1-800-563-1717). Radio Shack(R) products can be found nationally at retail locations, www.radioshack.com, or at 1-800-843-7422. All other parts can be ordered through GMSPO or SSPO. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 03-08-48-006H > Apr > 11 > A/C - Window Defroster Contact/Tab Repair Information > Page 2039 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Back Window Glass: > 00-08-48-005D > Sep > 10 > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Back Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Corner Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Front Corner Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Front Door Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information Quarter Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C Date: February 21, 2011 Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Wiper Concerns Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to avoid unnecessary replacements. Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review the information in their Owner Manual. Inspection and Cleaning Scheduled Maintenance - Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or contamination. - Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements. Cleaning Procedure Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct contact with washer fluid. Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades. - Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth. - Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking. Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami* (www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely. Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces. Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also recommends using plain water to clean interior glass. *"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 2065 Avoiding Wiper Damage The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others are environmental concerns. - Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear quickly and unevenly. - Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements. - Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas. - Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow. - Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades. - Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield. - Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition. Note GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes wipers to chatter and have premature wear. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 2066 Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Vehicle Glass Distortion Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-08-48-005D Date: September 10, 2010 Subject: Distortion in Outer Surface of Vehicle Glass Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-48-005C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Distortion in the outer surface of the windshield glass, door glass or backlite glass may appear after the vehicle has: - Accumulated some mileage. - Been frequently washed in automatic car washes, particularly "touchless" car washes. This distortion may look like a subtle orange peel pattern, or may look like a drip or sag etched into the surface of the glass. Some car wash solutions contain a buffered solution of hydrofluoric acid which is used to clean the glass. This should not cause a problem if used in the correct concentration. However, if not used correctly, hydrofluoric acid will attack the glass, and over time, will cause visual distortion in the outer surface of the glass which cannot be removed by scraping or polishing. If this condition is suspected, look at the area of the windshield under the wipers or below the belt seal on the side glass. The area of the glass below the wipers or belt seal will not be affected and what looks like a drip or sag may be apparent at the edge of the wiper or belt seal. You may also see a line on the glass where the wiper blade or the belt seal contacts the glass. Important The repair will require replacing the affected glass and is not a result of a defect in material or workmanship. Therefore, is not covered by New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Traverse Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.6L (2011)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C Date: February 21, 2011 Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Wiper Concerns Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to avoid unnecessary replacements. Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review the information in their Owner Manual. Inspection and Cleaning Scheduled Maintenance - Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or contamination. - Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements. Cleaning Procedure Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct contact with washer fluid. Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades. - Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth. - Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking. Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami* (www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely. Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces. Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also recommends using plain water to clean interior glass. *"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other sources.